mirror of
				https://github.com/sqlite/sqlite.git
				synced 2025-11-03 16:53:36 +03:00 
			
		
		
		
	[forum:/forumpost/b6edc69548|forum post b6edc69548]. This has no affect on SQLite itself. FossilOrigin-Name: 201569e09b000919ccb463bd581fb2ecd5320e7f584fdb1bc2aaba111061d5c3
		
			
				
	
	
		
			5894 lines
		
	
	
		
			177 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			C
		
	
	
	
	
	
			
		
		
	
	
			5894 lines
		
	
	
		
			177 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			C
		
	
	
	
	
	
/*
 | 
						|
** This file contains all sources (including headers) to the LEMON
 | 
						|
** LALR(1) parser generator.  The sources have been combined into a
 | 
						|
** single file to make it easy to include LEMON in the source tree
 | 
						|
** and Makefile of another program.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** The author of this program disclaims copyright.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
#include <stdio.h>
 | 
						|
#include <stdarg.h>
 | 
						|
#include <string.h>
 | 
						|
#include <ctype.h>
 | 
						|
#include <stdlib.h>
 | 
						|
#include <assert.h>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#define ISSPACE(X) isspace((unsigned char)(X))
 | 
						|
#define ISDIGIT(X) isdigit((unsigned char)(X))
 | 
						|
#define ISALNUM(X) isalnum((unsigned char)(X))
 | 
						|
#define ISALPHA(X) isalpha((unsigned char)(X))
 | 
						|
#define ISUPPER(X) isupper((unsigned char)(X))
 | 
						|
#define ISLOWER(X) islower((unsigned char)(X))
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#ifndef __WIN32__
 | 
						|
#   if defined(_WIN32) || defined(WIN32)
 | 
						|
#       define __WIN32__
 | 
						|
#   endif
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#ifdef __WIN32__
 | 
						|
#ifdef __cplusplus
 | 
						|
extern "C" {
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
extern int access(const char *path, int mode);
 | 
						|
#ifdef __cplusplus
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
#else
 | 
						|
#include <unistd.h>
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* #define PRIVATE static */
 | 
						|
#define PRIVATE
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#ifdef TEST
 | 
						|
#define MAXRHS 5       /* Set low to exercise exception code */
 | 
						|
#else
 | 
						|
#define MAXRHS 1000
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
extern void memory_error();
 | 
						|
static int showPrecedenceConflict = 0;
 | 
						|
static char *msort(char*,char**,int(*)(const char*,const char*));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Compilers are getting increasingly pedantic about type conversions
 | 
						|
** as C evolves ever closer to Ada....  To work around the latest problems
 | 
						|
** we have to define the following variant of strlen().
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
#define lemonStrlen(X)   ((int)strlen(X))
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Compilers are starting to complain about the use of sprintf() and strcpy(),
 | 
						|
** saying they are unsafe.  So we define our own versions of those routines too.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** There are three routines here:  lemon_sprintf(), lemon_vsprintf(), and
 | 
						|
** lemon_addtext(). The first two are replacements for sprintf() and vsprintf().
 | 
						|
** The third is a helper routine for vsnprintf() that adds texts to the end of a
 | 
						|
** buffer, making sure the buffer is always zero-terminated.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** The string formatter is a minimal subset of stdlib sprintf() supporting only
 | 
						|
** a few simply conversions:
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
**   %d
 | 
						|
**   %s
 | 
						|
**   %.*s
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static void lemon_addtext(
 | 
						|
  char *zBuf,           /* The buffer to which text is added */
 | 
						|
  int *pnUsed,          /* Slots of the buffer used so far */
 | 
						|
  const char *zIn,      /* Text to add */
 | 
						|
  int nIn,              /* Bytes of text to add.  -1 to use strlen() */
 | 
						|
  int iWidth            /* Field width.  Negative to left justify */
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  if( nIn<0 ) for(nIn=0; zIn[nIn]; nIn++){}
 | 
						|
  while( iWidth>nIn ){ zBuf[(*pnUsed)++] = ' '; iWidth--; }
 | 
						|
  if( nIn==0 ) return;
 | 
						|
  memcpy(&zBuf[*pnUsed], zIn, nIn);
 | 
						|
  *pnUsed += nIn;
 | 
						|
  while( (-iWidth)>nIn ){ zBuf[(*pnUsed)++] = ' '; iWidth++; }
 | 
						|
  zBuf[*pnUsed] = 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
static int lemon_vsprintf(char *str, const char *zFormat, va_list ap){
 | 
						|
  int i, j, k, c;
 | 
						|
  int nUsed = 0;
 | 
						|
  const char *z;
 | 
						|
  char zTemp[50];
 | 
						|
  str[0] = 0;
 | 
						|
  for(i=j=0; (c = zFormat[i])!=0; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( c=='%' ){
 | 
						|
      int iWidth = 0;
 | 
						|
      lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, &zFormat[j], i-j, 0);
 | 
						|
      c = zFormat[++i];
 | 
						|
      if( ISDIGIT(c) || (c=='-' && ISDIGIT(zFormat[i+1])) ){
 | 
						|
        if( c=='-' ) i++;
 | 
						|
        while( ISDIGIT(zFormat[i]) ) iWidth = iWidth*10 + zFormat[i++] - '0';
 | 
						|
        if( c=='-' ) iWidth = -iWidth;
 | 
						|
        c = zFormat[i];
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( c=='d' ){
 | 
						|
        int v = va_arg(ap, int);
 | 
						|
        if( v<0 ){
 | 
						|
          lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, "-", 1, iWidth);
 | 
						|
          v = -v;
 | 
						|
        }else if( v==0 ){
 | 
						|
          lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, "0", 1, iWidth);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        k = 0;
 | 
						|
        while( v>0 ){
 | 
						|
          k++;
 | 
						|
          zTemp[sizeof(zTemp)-k] = (v%10) + '0';
 | 
						|
          v /= 10;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, &zTemp[sizeof(zTemp)-k], k, iWidth);
 | 
						|
      }else if( c=='s' ){
 | 
						|
        z = va_arg(ap, const char*);
 | 
						|
        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, z, -1, iWidth);
 | 
						|
      }else if( c=='.' && memcmp(&zFormat[i], ".*s", 3)==0 ){
 | 
						|
        i += 2;
 | 
						|
        k = va_arg(ap, int);
 | 
						|
        z = va_arg(ap, const char*);
 | 
						|
        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, z, k, iWidth);
 | 
						|
      }else if( c=='%' ){
 | 
						|
        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, "%", 1, 0);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        fprintf(stderr, "illegal format\n");
 | 
						|
        exit(1);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      j = i+1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, &zFormat[j], i-j, 0);
 | 
						|
  return nUsed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
static int lemon_sprintf(char *str, const char *format, ...){
 | 
						|
  va_list ap;
 | 
						|
  int rc;
 | 
						|
  va_start(ap, format);
 | 
						|
  rc = lemon_vsprintf(str, format, ap);
 | 
						|
  va_end(ap);
 | 
						|
  return rc;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
static void lemon_strcpy(char *dest, const char *src){
 | 
						|
  while( (*(dest++) = *(src++))!=0 ){}
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
static void lemon_strcat(char *dest, const char *src){
 | 
						|
  while( *dest ) dest++;
 | 
						|
  lemon_strcpy(dest, src);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* a few forward declarations... */
 | 
						|
struct rule;
 | 
						|
struct lemon;
 | 
						|
struct action;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static struct action *Action_new(void);
 | 
						|
static struct action *Action_sort(struct action *);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********** From the file "build.h" ************************************/
 | 
						|
void FindRulePrecedences(struct lemon*);
 | 
						|
void FindFirstSets(struct lemon*);
 | 
						|
void FindStates(struct lemon*);
 | 
						|
void FindLinks(struct lemon*);
 | 
						|
void FindFollowSets(struct lemon*);
 | 
						|
void FindActions(struct lemon*);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********* From the file "configlist.h" *********************************/
 | 
						|
void Configlist_init(void);
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_add(struct rule *, int);
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_addbasis(struct rule *, int);
 | 
						|
void Configlist_closure(struct lemon *);
 | 
						|
void Configlist_sort(void);
 | 
						|
void Configlist_sortbasis(void);
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_return(void);
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_basis(void);
 | 
						|
void Configlist_eat(struct config *);
 | 
						|
void Configlist_reset(void);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********* From the file "error.h" ***************************************/
 | 
						|
void ErrorMsg(const char *, int,const char *, ...);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/****** From the file "option.h" ******************************************/
 | 
						|
enum option_type { OPT_FLAG=1,  OPT_INT,  OPT_DBL,  OPT_STR,
 | 
						|
         OPT_FFLAG, OPT_FINT, OPT_FDBL, OPT_FSTR};
 | 
						|
struct s_options {
 | 
						|
  enum option_type type;
 | 
						|
  const char *label;
 | 
						|
  char *arg;
 | 
						|
  const char *message;
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
int    OptInit(char**,struct s_options*,FILE*);
 | 
						|
int    OptNArgs(void);
 | 
						|
char  *OptArg(int);
 | 
						|
void   OptErr(int);
 | 
						|
void   OptPrint(void);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/******** From the file "parse.h" *****************************************/
 | 
						|
void Parse(struct lemon *lemp);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********* From the file "plink.h" ***************************************/
 | 
						|
struct plink *Plink_new(void);
 | 
						|
void Plink_add(struct plink **, struct config *);
 | 
						|
void Plink_copy(struct plink **, struct plink *);
 | 
						|
void Plink_delete(struct plink *);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********** From the file "report.h" *************************************/
 | 
						|
void Reprint(struct lemon *);
 | 
						|
void ReportOutput(struct lemon *);
 | 
						|
void ReportTable(struct lemon *, int, int);
 | 
						|
void ReportHeader(struct lemon *);
 | 
						|
void CompressTables(struct lemon *);
 | 
						|
void ResortStates(struct lemon *);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********** From the file "set.h" ****************************************/
 | 
						|
void  SetSize(int);             /* All sets will be of size N */
 | 
						|
char *SetNew(void);               /* A new set for element 0..N */
 | 
						|
void  SetFree(char*);             /* Deallocate a set */
 | 
						|
int SetAdd(char*,int);            /* Add element to a set */
 | 
						|
int SetUnion(char *,char *);    /* A <- A U B, thru element N */
 | 
						|
#define SetFind(X,Y) (X[Y])       /* True if Y is in set X */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********** From the file "struct.h" *************************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Principal data structures for the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
typedef enum {LEMON_FALSE=0, LEMON_TRUE} Boolean;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Symbols (terminals and nonterminals) of the grammar are stored
 | 
						|
** in the following: */
 | 
						|
enum symbol_type {
 | 
						|
  TERMINAL,
 | 
						|
  NONTERMINAL,
 | 
						|
  MULTITERMINAL
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
enum e_assoc {
 | 
						|
    LEFT,
 | 
						|
    RIGHT,
 | 
						|
    NONE,
 | 
						|
    UNK
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
struct symbol {
 | 
						|
  const char *name;        /* Name of the symbol */
 | 
						|
  int index;               /* Index number for this symbol */
 | 
						|
  enum symbol_type type;   /* Symbols are all either TERMINALS or NTs */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rule;       /* Linked list of rules of this (if an NT) */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *fallback; /* fallback token in case this token doesn't parse */
 | 
						|
  int prec;                /* Precedence if defined (-1 otherwise) */
 | 
						|
  enum e_assoc assoc;      /* Associativity if precedence is defined */
 | 
						|
  char *firstset;          /* First-set for all rules of this symbol */
 | 
						|
  Boolean lambda;          /* True if NT and can generate an empty string */
 | 
						|
  int useCnt;              /* Number of times used */
 | 
						|
  char *destructor;        /* Code which executes whenever this symbol is
 | 
						|
                           ** popped from the stack during error processing */
 | 
						|
  int destLineno;          /* Line number for start of destructor.  Set to
 | 
						|
                           ** -1 for duplicate destructors. */
 | 
						|
  char *datatype;          /* The data type of information held by this
 | 
						|
                           ** object. Only used if type==NONTERMINAL */
 | 
						|
  int dtnum;               /* The data type number.  In the parser, the value
 | 
						|
                           ** stack is a union.  The .yy%d element of this
 | 
						|
                           ** union is the correct data type for this object */
 | 
						|
  int bContent;            /* True if this symbol ever carries content - if
 | 
						|
                           ** it is ever more than just syntax */
 | 
						|
  /* The following fields are used by MULTITERMINALs only */
 | 
						|
  int nsubsym;             /* Number of constituent symbols in the MULTI */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol **subsym;  /* Array of constituent symbols */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Each production rule in the grammar is stored in the following
 | 
						|
** structure.  */
 | 
						|
struct rule {
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *lhs;      /* Left-hand side of the rule */
 | 
						|
  const char *lhsalias;    /* Alias for the LHS (NULL if none) */
 | 
						|
  int lhsStart;            /* True if left-hand side is the start symbol */
 | 
						|
  int ruleline;            /* Line number for the rule */
 | 
						|
  int nrhs;                /* Number of RHS symbols */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol **rhs;     /* The RHS symbols */
 | 
						|
  const char **rhsalias;   /* An alias for each RHS symbol (NULL if none) */
 | 
						|
  int line;                /* Line number at which code begins */
 | 
						|
  const char *code;        /* The code executed when this rule is reduced */
 | 
						|
  const char *codePrefix;  /* Setup code before code[] above */
 | 
						|
  const char *codeSuffix;  /* Breakdown code after code[] above */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *precsym;  /* Precedence symbol for this rule */
 | 
						|
  int index;               /* An index number for this rule */
 | 
						|
  int iRule;               /* Rule number as used in the generated tables */
 | 
						|
  Boolean noCode;          /* True if this rule has no associated C code */
 | 
						|
  Boolean codeEmitted;     /* True if the code has been emitted already */
 | 
						|
  Boolean canReduce;       /* True if this rule is ever reduced */
 | 
						|
  Boolean doesReduce;      /* Reduce actions occur after optimization */
 | 
						|
  Boolean neverReduce;     /* Reduce is theoretically possible, but prevented
 | 
						|
                           ** by actions or other outside implementation */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *nextlhs;    /* Next rule with the same LHS */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *next;       /* Next rule in the global list */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* A configuration is a production rule of the grammar together with
 | 
						|
** a mark (dot) showing how much of that rule has been processed so far.
 | 
						|
** Configurations also contain a follow-set which is a list of terminal
 | 
						|
** symbols which are allowed to immediately follow the end of the rule.
 | 
						|
** Every configuration is recorded as an instance of the following: */
 | 
						|
enum cfgstatus {
 | 
						|
  COMPLETE,
 | 
						|
  INCOMPLETE
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
struct config {
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;         /* The rule upon which the configuration is based */
 | 
						|
  int dot;                 /* The parse point */
 | 
						|
  char *fws;               /* Follow-set for this configuration only */
 | 
						|
  struct plink *fplp;      /* Follow-set forward propagation links */
 | 
						|
  struct plink *bplp;      /* Follow-set backwards propagation links */
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;       /* Pointer to state which contains this */
 | 
						|
  enum cfgstatus status;   /* used during followset and shift computations */
 | 
						|
  struct config *next;     /* Next configuration in the state */
 | 
						|
  struct config *bp;       /* The next basis configuration */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
enum e_action {
 | 
						|
  SHIFT,
 | 
						|
  ACCEPT,
 | 
						|
  REDUCE,
 | 
						|
  ERROR,
 | 
						|
  SSCONFLICT,              /* A shift/shift conflict */
 | 
						|
  SRCONFLICT,              /* Was a reduce, but part of a conflict */
 | 
						|
  RRCONFLICT,              /* Was a reduce, but part of a conflict */
 | 
						|
  SH_RESOLVED,             /* Was a shift.  Precedence resolved conflict */
 | 
						|
  RD_RESOLVED,             /* Was reduce.  Precedence resolved conflict */
 | 
						|
  NOT_USED,                /* Deleted by compression */
 | 
						|
  SHIFTREDUCE              /* Shift first, then reduce */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Every shift or reduce operation is stored as one of the following */
 | 
						|
struct action {
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp;       /* The look-ahead symbol */
 | 
						|
  enum e_action type;
 | 
						|
  union {
 | 
						|
    struct state *stp;     /* The new state, if a shift */
 | 
						|
    struct rule *rp;       /* The rule, if a reduce */
 | 
						|
  } x;
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *spOpt;    /* SHIFTREDUCE optimization to this symbol */
 | 
						|
  struct action *next;     /* Next action for this state */
 | 
						|
  struct action *collide;  /* Next action with the same hash */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Each state of the generated parser's finite state machine
 | 
						|
** is encoded as an instance of the following structure. */
 | 
						|
struct state {
 | 
						|
  struct config *bp;       /* The basis configurations for this state */
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp;      /* All configurations in this set */
 | 
						|
  int statenum;            /* Sequential number for this state */
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap;       /* List of actions for this state */
 | 
						|
  int nTknAct, nNtAct;     /* Number of actions on terminals and nonterminals */
 | 
						|
  int iTknOfst, iNtOfst;   /* yy_action[] offset for terminals and nonterms */
 | 
						|
  int iDfltReduce;         /* Default action is to REDUCE by this rule */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *pDfltReduce;/* The default REDUCE rule. */
 | 
						|
  int autoReduce;          /* True if this is an auto-reduce state */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
#define NO_OFFSET (-2147483647)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* A followset propagation link indicates that the contents of one
 | 
						|
** configuration followset should be propagated to another whenever
 | 
						|
** the first changes. */
 | 
						|
struct plink {
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp;      /* The configuration to which linked */
 | 
						|
  struct plink *next;      /* The next propagate link */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The state vector for the entire parser generator is recorded as
 | 
						|
** follows.  (LEMON uses no global variables and makes little use of
 | 
						|
** static variables.  Fields in the following structure can be thought
 | 
						|
** of as begin global variables in the program.) */
 | 
						|
struct lemon {
 | 
						|
  struct state **sorted;   /* Table of states sorted by state number */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rule;       /* List of all rules */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *startRule;  /* First rule */
 | 
						|
  int nstate;              /* Number of states */
 | 
						|
  int nxstate;             /* nstate with tail degenerate states removed */
 | 
						|
  int nrule;               /* Number of rules */
 | 
						|
  int nruleWithAction;     /* Number of rules with actions */
 | 
						|
  int nsymbol;             /* Number of terminal and nonterminal symbols */
 | 
						|
  int nterminal;           /* Number of terminal symbols */
 | 
						|
  int minShiftReduce;      /* Minimum shift-reduce action value */
 | 
						|
  int errAction;           /* Error action value */
 | 
						|
  int accAction;           /* Accept action value */
 | 
						|
  int noAction;            /* No-op action value */
 | 
						|
  int minReduce;           /* Minimum reduce action */
 | 
						|
  int maxAction;           /* Maximum action value of any kind */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol **symbols; /* Sorted array of pointers to symbols */
 | 
						|
  int errorcnt;            /* Number of errors */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *errsym;   /* The error symbol */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *wildcard; /* Token that matches anything */
 | 
						|
  char *name;              /* Name of the generated parser */
 | 
						|
  char *arg;               /* Declaration of the 3rd argument to parser */
 | 
						|
  char *ctx;               /* Declaration of 2nd argument to constructor */
 | 
						|
  char *tokentype;         /* Type of terminal symbols in the parser stack */
 | 
						|
  char *vartype;           /* The default type of non-terminal symbols */
 | 
						|
  char *start;             /* Name of the start symbol for the grammar */
 | 
						|
  char *stacksize;         /* Size of the parser stack */
 | 
						|
  char *include;           /* Code to put at the start of the C file */
 | 
						|
  char *error;             /* Code to execute when an error is seen */
 | 
						|
  char *overflow;          /* Code to execute on a stack overflow */
 | 
						|
  char *failure;           /* Code to execute on parser failure */
 | 
						|
  char *accept;            /* Code to execute when the parser excepts */
 | 
						|
  char *extracode;         /* Code appended to the generated file */
 | 
						|
  char *tokendest;         /* Code to execute to destroy token data */
 | 
						|
  char *vardest;           /* Code for the default non-terminal destructor */
 | 
						|
  char *filename;          /* Name of the input file */
 | 
						|
  char *outname;           /* Name of the current output file */
 | 
						|
  char *tokenprefix;       /* A prefix added to token names in the .h file */
 | 
						|
  int nconflict;           /* Number of parsing conflicts */
 | 
						|
  int nactiontab;          /* Number of entries in the yy_action[] table */
 | 
						|
  int nlookaheadtab;       /* Number of entries in yy_lookahead[] */
 | 
						|
  int tablesize;           /* Total table size of all tables in bytes */
 | 
						|
  int basisflag;           /* Print only basis configurations */
 | 
						|
  int printPreprocessed;   /* Show preprocessor output on stdout */
 | 
						|
  int has_fallback;        /* True if any %fallback is seen in the grammar */
 | 
						|
  int nolinenosflag;       /* True if #line statements should not be printed */
 | 
						|
  char *argv0;             /* Name of the program */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#define MemoryCheck(X) if((X)==0){ \
 | 
						|
  extern void memory_error(); \
 | 
						|
  memory_error(); \
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/**************** From the file "table.h" *********************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** All code in this file has been automatically generated
 | 
						|
** from a specification in the file
 | 
						|
**              "table.q"
 | 
						|
** by the associative array code building program "aagen".
 | 
						|
** Do not edit this file!  Instead, edit the specification
 | 
						|
** file, then rerun aagen.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Code for processing tables in the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
/* Routines for handling a strings */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
const char *Strsafe(const char *);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void Strsafe_init(void);
 | 
						|
int Strsafe_insert(const char *);
 | 
						|
const char *Strsafe_find(const char *);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Routines for handling symbols of the grammar */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
struct symbol *Symbol_new(const char *);
 | 
						|
int Symbolcmpp(const void *, const void *);
 | 
						|
void Symbol_init(void);
 | 
						|
int Symbol_insert(struct symbol *, const char *);
 | 
						|
struct symbol *Symbol_find(const char *);
 | 
						|
struct symbol *Symbol_Nth(int);
 | 
						|
int Symbol_count(void);
 | 
						|
struct symbol **Symbol_arrayof(void);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Routines to manage the state table */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int Configcmp(const char *, const char *);
 | 
						|
struct state *State_new(void);
 | 
						|
void State_init(void);
 | 
						|
int State_insert(struct state *, struct config *);
 | 
						|
struct state *State_find(struct config *);
 | 
						|
struct state **State_arrayof(void);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Routines used for efficiency in Configlist_add */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void Configtable_init(void);
 | 
						|
int Configtable_insert(struct config *);
 | 
						|
struct config *Configtable_find(struct config *);
 | 
						|
void Configtable_clear(int(*)(struct config *));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/****************** From the file "action.c" *******************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Routines processing parser actions in the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new parser action */
 | 
						|
static struct action *Action_new(void){
 | 
						|
  static struct action *actionfreelist = 0;
 | 
						|
  struct action *newaction;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( actionfreelist==0 ){
 | 
						|
    int i;
 | 
						|
    int amt = 100;
 | 
						|
    actionfreelist = (struct action *)calloc(amt, sizeof(struct action));
 | 
						|
    if( actionfreelist==0 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(stderr,"Unable to allocate memory for a new parser action.");
 | 
						|
      exit(1);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<amt-1; i++) actionfreelist[i].next = &actionfreelist[i+1];
 | 
						|
    actionfreelist[amt-1].next = 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  newaction = actionfreelist;
 | 
						|
  actionfreelist = actionfreelist->next;
 | 
						|
  return newaction;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compare two actions for sorting purposes.  Return negative, zero, or
 | 
						|
** positive if the first action is less than, equal to, or greater than
 | 
						|
** the first
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int actioncmp(
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap1,
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap2
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  int rc;
 | 
						|
  rc = ap1->sp->index - ap2->sp->index;
 | 
						|
  if( rc==0 ){
 | 
						|
    rc = (int)ap1->type - (int)ap2->type;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( rc==0 && (ap1->type==REDUCE || ap1->type==SHIFTREDUCE) ){
 | 
						|
    rc = ap1->x.rp->index - ap2->x.rp->index;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( rc==0 ){
 | 
						|
    rc = (int) (ap2 - ap1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return rc;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Sort parser actions */
 | 
						|
static struct action *Action_sort(
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  ap = (struct action *)msort((char *)ap,(char **)&ap->next,
 | 
						|
                              (int(*)(const char*,const char*))actioncmp);
 | 
						|
  return ap;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void Action_add(
 | 
						|
  struct action **app,
 | 
						|
  enum e_action type,
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp,
 | 
						|
  char *arg
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  struct action *newaction;
 | 
						|
  newaction = Action_new();
 | 
						|
  newaction->next = *app;
 | 
						|
  *app = newaction;
 | 
						|
  newaction->type = type;
 | 
						|
  newaction->sp = sp;
 | 
						|
  newaction->spOpt = 0;
 | 
						|
  if( type==SHIFT ){
 | 
						|
    newaction->x.stp = (struct state *)arg;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    newaction->x.rp = (struct rule *)arg;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/********************** New code to implement the "acttab" module ***********/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** This module implements routines use to construct the yy_action[] table.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** The state of the yy_action table under construction is an instance of
 | 
						|
** the following structure.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** The yy_action table maps the pair (state_number, lookahead) into an
 | 
						|
** action_number.  The table is an array of integers pairs.  The state_number
 | 
						|
** determines an initial offset into the yy_action array.  The lookahead
 | 
						|
** value is then added to this initial offset to get an index X into the
 | 
						|
** yy_action array. If the aAction[X].lookahead equals the value of the
 | 
						|
** of the lookahead input, then the value of the action_number output is
 | 
						|
** aAction[X].action.  If the lookaheads do not match then the
 | 
						|
** default action for the state_number is returned.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** All actions associated with a single state_number are first entered
 | 
						|
** into aLookahead[] using multiple calls to acttab_action().  Then the
 | 
						|
** actions for that single state_number are placed into the aAction[]
 | 
						|
** array with a single call to acttab_insert().  The acttab_insert() call
 | 
						|
** also resets the aLookahead[] array in preparation for the next
 | 
						|
** state number.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
struct lookahead_action {
 | 
						|
  int lookahead;             /* Value of the lookahead token */
 | 
						|
  int action;                /* Action to take on the given lookahead */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
typedef struct acttab acttab;
 | 
						|
struct acttab {
 | 
						|
  int nAction;                 /* Number of used slots in aAction[] */
 | 
						|
  int nActionAlloc;            /* Slots allocated for aAction[] */
 | 
						|
  struct lookahead_action
 | 
						|
    *aAction,                  /* The yy_action[] table under construction */
 | 
						|
    *aLookahead;               /* A single new transaction set */
 | 
						|
  int mnLookahead;             /* Minimum aLookahead[].lookahead */
 | 
						|
  int mnAction;                /* Action associated with mnLookahead */
 | 
						|
  int mxLookahead;             /* Maximum aLookahead[].lookahead */
 | 
						|
  int nLookahead;              /* Used slots in aLookahead[] */
 | 
						|
  int nLookaheadAlloc;         /* Slots allocated in aLookahead[] */
 | 
						|
  int nterminal;               /* Number of terminal symbols */
 | 
						|
  int nsymbol;                 /* total number of symbols */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return the number of entries in the yy_action table */
 | 
						|
#define acttab_lookahead_size(X) ((X)->nAction)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The value for the N-th entry in yy_action */
 | 
						|
#define acttab_yyaction(X,N)  ((X)->aAction[N].action)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The value for the N-th entry in yy_lookahead */
 | 
						|
#define acttab_yylookahead(X,N)  ((X)->aAction[N].lookahead)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Free all memory associated with the given acttab */
 | 
						|
void acttab_free(acttab *p){
 | 
						|
  free( p->aAction );
 | 
						|
  free( p->aLookahead );
 | 
						|
  free( p );
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new acttab structure */
 | 
						|
acttab *acttab_alloc(int nsymbol, int nterminal){
 | 
						|
  acttab *p = (acttab *) calloc( 1, sizeof(*p) );
 | 
						|
  if( p==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Unable to allocate memory for a new acttab.");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  memset(p, 0, sizeof(*p));
 | 
						|
  p->nsymbol = nsymbol;
 | 
						|
  p->nterminal = nterminal;
 | 
						|
  return p;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Add a new action to the current transaction set.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** This routine is called once for each lookahead for a particular
 | 
						|
** state.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void acttab_action(acttab *p, int lookahead, int action){
 | 
						|
  if( p->nLookahead>=p->nLookaheadAlloc ){
 | 
						|
    p->nLookaheadAlloc += 25;
 | 
						|
    p->aLookahead = (struct lookahead_action *) realloc( p->aLookahead,
 | 
						|
                             sizeof(p->aLookahead[0])*p->nLookaheadAlloc );
 | 
						|
    if( p->aLookahead==0 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(stderr,"malloc failed\n");
 | 
						|
      exit(1);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( p->nLookahead==0 ){
 | 
						|
    p->mxLookahead = lookahead;
 | 
						|
    p->mnLookahead = lookahead;
 | 
						|
    p->mnAction = action;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    if( p->mxLookahead<lookahead ) p->mxLookahead = lookahead;
 | 
						|
    if( p->mnLookahead>lookahead ){
 | 
						|
      p->mnLookahead = lookahead;
 | 
						|
      p->mnAction = action;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  p->aLookahead[p->nLookahead].lookahead = lookahead;
 | 
						|
  p->aLookahead[p->nLookahead].action = action;
 | 
						|
  p->nLookahead++;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Add the transaction set built up with prior calls to acttab_action()
 | 
						|
** into the current action table.  Then reset the transaction set back
 | 
						|
** to an empty set in preparation for a new round of acttab_action() calls.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Return the offset into the action table of the new transaction.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** If the makeItSafe parameter is true, then the offset is chosen so that
 | 
						|
** it is impossible to overread the yy_lookaside[] table regardless of
 | 
						|
** the lookaside token.  This is done for the terminal symbols, as they
 | 
						|
** come from external inputs and can contain syntax errors.  When makeItSafe
 | 
						|
** is false, there is more flexibility in selecting offsets, resulting in
 | 
						|
** a smaller table.  For non-terminal symbols, which are never syntax errors,
 | 
						|
** makeItSafe can be false.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
int acttab_insert(acttab *p, int makeItSafe){
 | 
						|
  int i, j, k, n, end;
 | 
						|
  assert( p->nLookahead>0 );
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Make sure we have enough space to hold the expanded action table
 | 
						|
  ** in the worst case.  The worst case occurs if the transaction set
 | 
						|
  ** must be appended to the current action table
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  n = p->nsymbol + 1;
 | 
						|
  if( p->nAction + n >= p->nActionAlloc ){
 | 
						|
    int oldAlloc = p->nActionAlloc;
 | 
						|
    p->nActionAlloc = p->nAction + n + p->nActionAlloc + 20;
 | 
						|
    p->aAction = (struct lookahead_action *) realloc( p->aAction,
 | 
						|
                          sizeof(p->aAction[0])*p->nActionAlloc);
 | 
						|
    if( p->aAction==0 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(stderr,"malloc failed\n");
 | 
						|
      exit(1);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    for(i=oldAlloc; i<p->nActionAlloc; i++){
 | 
						|
      p->aAction[i].lookahead = -1;
 | 
						|
      p->aAction[i].action = -1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Scan the existing action table looking for an offset that is a
 | 
						|
  ** duplicate of the current transaction set.  Fall out of the loop
 | 
						|
  ** if and when the duplicate is found.
 | 
						|
  **
 | 
						|
  ** i is the index in p->aAction[] where p->mnLookahead is inserted.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  end = makeItSafe ? p->mnLookahead : 0;
 | 
						|
  for(i=p->nAction-1; i>=end; i--){
 | 
						|
    if( p->aAction[i].lookahead==p->mnLookahead ){
 | 
						|
      /* All lookaheads and actions in the aLookahead[] transaction
 | 
						|
      ** must match against the candidate aAction[i] entry. */
 | 
						|
      if( p->aAction[i].action!=p->mnAction ) continue;
 | 
						|
      for(j=0; j<p->nLookahead; j++){
 | 
						|
        k = p->aLookahead[j].lookahead - p->mnLookahead + i;
 | 
						|
        if( k<0 || k>=p->nAction ) break;
 | 
						|
        if( p->aLookahead[j].lookahead!=p->aAction[k].lookahead ) break;
 | 
						|
        if( p->aLookahead[j].action!=p->aAction[k].action ) break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( j<p->nLookahead ) continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      /* No possible lookahead value that is not in the aLookahead[]
 | 
						|
      ** transaction is allowed to match aAction[i] */
 | 
						|
      n = 0;
 | 
						|
      for(j=0; j<p->nAction; j++){
 | 
						|
        if( p->aAction[j].lookahead<0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
        if( p->aAction[j].lookahead==j+p->mnLookahead-i ) n++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( n==p->nLookahead ){
 | 
						|
        break;  /* An exact match is found at offset i */
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* If no existing offsets exactly match the current transaction, find an
 | 
						|
  ** an empty offset in the aAction[] table in which we can add the
 | 
						|
  ** aLookahead[] transaction.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  if( i<end ){
 | 
						|
    /* Look for holes in the aAction[] table that fit the current
 | 
						|
    ** aLookahead[] transaction.  Leave i set to the offset of the hole.
 | 
						|
    ** If no holes are found, i is left at p->nAction, which means the
 | 
						|
    ** transaction will be appended. */
 | 
						|
    i = makeItSafe ? p->mnLookahead : 0;
 | 
						|
    for(; i<p->nActionAlloc - p->mxLookahead; i++){
 | 
						|
      if( p->aAction[i].lookahead<0 ){
 | 
						|
        for(j=0; j<p->nLookahead; j++){
 | 
						|
          k = p->aLookahead[j].lookahead - p->mnLookahead + i;
 | 
						|
          if( k<0 ) break;
 | 
						|
          if( p->aAction[k].lookahead>=0 ) break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if( j<p->nLookahead ) continue;
 | 
						|
        for(j=0; j<p->nAction; j++){
 | 
						|
          if( p->aAction[j].lookahead==j+p->mnLookahead-i ) break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if( j==p->nAction ){
 | 
						|
          break;  /* Fits in empty slots */
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Insert transaction set at index i. */
 | 
						|
#if 0
 | 
						|
  printf("Acttab:");
 | 
						|
  for(j=0; j<p->nLookahead; j++){
 | 
						|
    printf(" %d", p->aLookahead[j].lookahead);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  printf(" inserted at %d\n", i);
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
  for(j=0; j<p->nLookahead; j++){
 | 
						|
    k = p->aLookahead[j].lookahead - p->mnLookahead + i;
 | 
						|
    p->aAction[k] = p->aLookahead[j];
 | 
						|
    if( k>=p->nAction ) p->nAction = k+1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( makeItSafe && i+p->nterminal>=p->nAction ) p->nAction = i+p->nterminal+1;
 | 
						|
  p->nLookahead = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Return the offset that is added to the lookahead in order to get the
 | 
						|
  ** index into yy_action of the action */
 | 
						|
  return i - p->mnLookahead;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Return the size of the action table without the trailing syntax error
 | 
						|
** entries.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
int acttab_action_size(acttab *p){
 | 
						|
  int n = p->nAction;
 | 
						|
  while( n>0 && p->aAction[n-1].lookahead<0 ){ n--; }
 | 
						|
  return n;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/********************** From the file "build.c" *****************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Routines to construction the finite state machine for the LEMON
 | 
						|
** parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Find a precedence symbol of every rule in the grammar.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Those rules which have a precedence symbol coded in the input
 | 
						|
** grammar using the "[symbol]" construct will already have the
 | 
						|
** rp->precsym field filled.  Other rules take as their precedence
 | 
						|
** symbol the first RHS symbol with a defined precedence.  If there
 | 
						|
** are not RHS symbols with a defined precedence, the precedence
 | 
						|
** symbol field is left blank.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void FindRulePrecedences(struct lemon *xp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
  for(rp=xp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    if( rp->precsym==0 ){
 | 
						|
      int i, j;
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs && rp->precsym==0; i++){
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
        if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
          for(j=0; j<sp->nsubsym; j++){
 | 
						|
            if( sp->subsym[j]->prec>=0 ){
 | 
						|
              rp->precsym = sp->subsym[j];
 | 
						|
              break;
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }else if( sp->prec>=0 ){
 | 
						|
          rp->precsym = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Find all nonterminals which will generate the empty string.
 | 
						|
** Then go back and compute the first sets of every nonterminal.
 | 
						|
** The first set is the set of all terminal symbols which can begin
 | 
						|
** a string generated by that nonterminal.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void FindFirstSets(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i, j;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
  int progress;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    lemp->symbols[i]->lambda = LEMON_FALSE;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=lemp->nterminal; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    lemp->symbols[i]->firstset = SetNew();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* First compute all lambdas */
 | 
						|
  do{
 | 
						|
    progress = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
      if( rp->lhs->lambda ) continue;
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
        assert( sp->type==NONTERMINAL || sp->lambda==LEMON_FALSE );
 | 
						|
        if( sp->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( i==rp->nrhs ){
 | 
						|
        rp->lhs->lambda = LEMON_TRUE;
 | 
						|
        progress = 1;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }while( progress );
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Now compute all first sets */
 | 
						|
  do{
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *s1, *s2;
 | 
						|
    progress = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
      s1 = rp->lhs;
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
        s2 = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
        if( s2->type==TERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
          progress += SetAdd(s1->firstset,s2->index);
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }else if( s2->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
          for(j=0; j<s2->nsubsym; j++){
 | 
						|
            progress += SetAdd(s1->firstset,s2->subsym[j]->index);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }else if( s1==s2 ){
 | 
						|
          if( s1->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          progress += SetUnion(s1->firstset,s2->firstset);
 | 
						|
          if( s2->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }while( progress );
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compute all LR(0) states for the grammar.  Links
 | 
						|
** are added to between some states so that the LR(1) follow sets
 | 
						|
** can be computed later.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE struct state *getstate(struct lemon *);  /* forward reference */
 | 
						|
void FindStates(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Configlist_init();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Find the start symbol */
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->start ){
 | 
						|
    sp = Symbol_find(lemp->start);
 | 
						|
    if( sp==0 ){
 | 
						|
      ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,0,
 | 
						|
        "The specified start symbol \"%s\" is not "
 | 
						|
        "in a nonterminal of the grammar.  \"%s\" will be used as the start "
 | 
						|
        "symbol instead.",lemp->start,lemp->startRule->lhs->name);
 | 
						|
      lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }else if( lemp->startRule ){
 | 
						|
    sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,0,"Internal error - no start rule\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Make sure the start symbol doesn't occur on the right-hand side of
 | 
						|
  ** any rule.  Report an error if it does.  (YACC would generate a new
 | 
						|
  ** start symbol in this case.) */
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    int i;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
      if( rp->rhs[i]==sp ){   /* FIX ME:  Deal with multiterminals */
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,0,
 | 
						|
          "The start symbol \"%s\" occurs on the "
 | 
						|
          "right-hand side of a rule. This will result in a parser which "
 | 
						|
          "does not work properly.",sp->name);
 | 
						|
        lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* The basis configuration set for the first state
 | 
						|
  ** is all rules which have the start symbol as their
 | 
						|
  ** left-hand side */
 | 
						|
  for(rp=sp->rule; rp; rp=rp->nextlhs){
 | 
						|
    struct config *newcfp;
 | 
						|
    rp->lhsStart = 1;
 | 
						|
    newcfp = Configlist_addbasis(rp,0);
 | 
						|
    SetAdd(newcfp->fws,0);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Compute the first state.  All other states will be
 | 
						|
  ** computed automatically during the computation of the first one.
 | 
						|
  ** The returned pointer to the first state is not used. */
 | 
						|
  (void)getstate(lemp);
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to a state which is described by the configuration
 | 
						|
** list which has been built from calls to Configlist_add.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void buildshifts(struct lemon *, struct state *); /* Forwd ref */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE struct state *getstate(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp, *bp;
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Extract the sorted basis of the new state.  The basis was constructed
 | 
						|
  ** by prior calls to "Configlist_addbasis()". */
 | 
						|
  Configlist_sortbasis();
 | 
						|
  bp = Configlist_basis();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Get a state with the same basis */
 | 
						|
  stp = State_find(bp);
 | 
						|
  if( stp ){
 | 
						|
    /* A state with the same basis already exists!  Copy all the follow-set
 | 
						|
    ** propagation links from the state under construction into the
 | 
						|
    ** preexisting state, then return a pointer to the preexisting state */
 | 
						|
    struct config *x, *y;
 | 
						|
    for(x=bp, y=stp->bp; x && y; x=x->bp, y=y->bp){
 | 
						|
      Plink_copy(&y->bplp,x->bplp);
 | 
						|
      Plink_delete(x->fplp);
 | 
						|
      x->fplp = x->bplp = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    cfp = Configlist_return();
 | 
						|
    Configlist_eat(cfp);
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    /* This really is a new state.  Construct all the details */
 | 
						|
    Configlist_closure(lemp);    /* Compute the configuration closure */
 | 
						|
    Configlist_sort();           /* Sort the configuration closure */
 | 
						|
    cfp = Configlist_return();   /* Get a pointer to the config list */
 | 
						|
    stp = State_new();           /* A new state structure */
 | 
						|
    MemoryCheck(stp);
 | 
						|
    stp->bp = bp;                /* Remember the configuration basis */
 | 
						|
    stp->cfp = cfp;              /* Remember the configuration closure */
 | 
						|
    stp->statenum = lemp->nstate++; /* Every state gets a sequence number */
 | 
						|
    stp->ap = 0;                 /* No actions, yet. */
 | 
						|
    State_insert(stp,stp->bp);   /* Add to the state table */
 | 
						|
    buildshifts(lemp,stp);       /* Recursively compute successor states */
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return stp;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Return true if two symbols are the same.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
int same_symbol(struct symbol *a, struct symbol *b)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  if( a==b ) return 1;
 | 
						|
  if( a->type!=MULTITERMINAL ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  if( b->type!=MULTITERMINAL ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  if( a->nsubsym!=b->nsubsym ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<a->nsubsym; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( a->subsym[i]!=b->subsym[i] ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Construct all successor states to the given state.  A "successor"
 | 
						|
** state is any state which can be reached by a shift action.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void buildshifts(struct lemon *lemp, struct state *stp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp;  /* For looping thru the config closure of "stp" */
 | 
						|
  struct config *bcfp; /* For the inner loop on config closure of "stp" */
 | 
						|
  struct config *newcfg;  /* */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp;   /* Symbol following the dot in configuration "cfp" */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *bsp;  /* Symbol following the dot in configuration "bcfp" */
 | 
						|
  struct state *newstp; /* A pointer to a successor state */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Each configuration becomes complete after it contributes to a successor
 | 
						|
  ** state.  Initially, all configurations are incomplete */
 | 
						|
  for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next) cfp->status = INCOMPLETE;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Loop through all configurations of the state "stp" */
 | 
						|
  for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
 | 
						|
    if( cfp->status==COMPLETE ) continue;    /* Already used by inner loop */
 | 
						|
    if( cfp->dot>=cfp->rp->nrhs ) continue;  /* Can't shift this config */
 | 
						|
    Configlist_reset();                      /* Reset the new config set */
 | 
						|
    sp = cfp->rp->rhs[cfp->dot];             /* Symbol after the dot */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* For every configuration in the state "stp" which has the symbol "sp"
 | 
						|
    ** following its dot, add the same configuration to the basis set under
 | 
						|
    ** construction but with the dot shifted one symbol to the right. */
 | 
						|
    for(bcfp=cfp; bcfp; bcfp=bcfp->next){
 | 
						|
      if( bcfp->status==COMPLETE ) continue;    /* Already used */
 | 
						|
      if( bcfp->dot>=bcfp->rp->nrhs ) continue; /* Can't shift this one */
 | 
						|
      bsp = bcfp->rp->rhs[bcfp->dot];           /* Get symbol after dot */
 | 
						|
      if( !same_symbol(bsp,sp) ) continue;      /* Must be same as for "cfp" */
 | 
						|
      bcfp->status = COMPLETE;                  /* Mark this config as used */
 | 
						|
      newcfg = Configlist_addbasis(bcfp->rp,bcfp->dot+1);
 | 
						|
      Plink_add(&newcfg->bplp,bcfp);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Get a pointer to the state described by the basis configuration set
 | 
						|
    ** constructed in the preceding loop */
 | 
						|
    newstp = getstate(lemp);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* The state "newstp" is reached from the state "stp" by a shift action
 | 
						|
    ** on the symbol "sp" */
 | 
						|
    if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
      int i;
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<sp->nsubsym; i++){
 | 
						|
        Action_add(&stp->ap,SHIFT,sp->subsym[i],(char*)newstp);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      Action_add(&stp->ap,SHIFT,sp,(char *)newstp);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Construct the propagation links
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void FindLinks(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp, *other;
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;
 | 
						|
  struct plink *plp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Housekeeping detail:
 | 
						|
  ** Add to every propagate link a pointer back to the state to
 | 
						|
  ** which the link is attached. */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    for(cfp=stp?stp->cfp:0; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
 | 
						|
      cfp->stp = stp;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Convert all backlinks into forward links.  Only the forward
 | 
						|
  ** links are used in the follow-set computation. */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    for(cfp=stp?stp->cfp:0; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
 | 
						|
      for(plp=cfp->bplp; plp; plp=plp->next){
 | 
						|
        other = plp->cfp;
 | 
						|
        Plink_add(&other->fplp,cfp);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compute all followsets.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** A followset is the set of all symbols which can come immediately
 | 
						|
** after a configuration.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void FindFollowSets(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp;
 | 
						|
  struct plink *plp;
 | 
						|
  int progress;
 | 
						|
  int change;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    assert( lemp->sorted[i]!=0 );
 | 
						|
    for(cfp=lemp->sorted[i]->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
 | 
						|
      cfp->status = INCOMPLETE;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  do{
 | 
						|
    progress = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
      assert( lemp->sorted[i]!=0 );
 | 
						|
      for(cfp=lemp->sorted[i]->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
 | 
						|
        if( cfp->status==COMPLETE ) continue;
 | 
						|
        for(plp=cfp->fplp; plp; plp=plp->next){
 | 
						|
          change = SetUnion(plp->cfp->fws,cfp->fws);
 | 
						|
          if( change ){
 | 
						|
            plp->cfp->status = INCOMPLETE;
 | 
						|
            progress = 1;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        cfp->status = COMPLETE;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }while( progress );
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static int resolve_conflict(struct action *,struct action *);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compute the reduce actions, and resolve conflicts.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void FindActions(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i,j;
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp;
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Add all of the reduce actions
 | 
						|
  ** A reduce action is added for each element of the followset of
 | 
						|
  ** a configuration which has its dot at the extreme right.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){   /* Loop over all states */
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){  /* Loop over all configurations */
 | 
						|
      if( cfp->rp->nrhs==cfp->dot ){        /* Is dot at extreme right? */
 | 
						|
        for(j=0; j<lemp->nterminal; j++){
 | 
						|
          if( SetFind(cfp->fws,j) ){
 | 
						|
            /* Add a reduce action to the state "stp" which will reduce by the
 | 
						|
            ** rule "cfp->rp" if the lookahead symbol is "lemp->symbols[j]" */
 | 
						|
            Action_add(&stp->ap,REDUCE,lemp->symbols[j],(char *)cfp->rp);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Add the accepting token */
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->start ){
 | 
						|
    sp = Symbol_find(lemp->start);
 | 
						|
    if( sp==0 ){
 | 
						|
      if( lemp->startRule==0 ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(stderr, "internal error on source line %d: no start rule\n",
 | 
						|
                __LINE__);
 | 
						|
        exit(1);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Add to the first state (which is always the starting state of the
 | 
						|
  ** finite state machine) an action to ACCEPT if the lookahead is the
 | 
						|
  ** start nonterminal.  */
 | 
						|
  Action_add(&lemp->sorted[0]->ap,ACCEPT,sp,0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Resolve conflicts */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    struct action *ap, *nap;
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    /* assert( stp->ap ); */
 | 
						|
    stp->ap = Action_sort(stp->ap);
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap && ap->next; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      for(nap=ap->next; nap && nap->sp==ap->sp; nap=nap->next){
 | 
						|
         /* The two actions "ap" and "nap" have the same lookahead.
 | 
						|
         ** Figure out which one should be used */
 | 
						|
         lemp->nconflict += resolve_conflict(ap,nap);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Report an error for each rule that can never be reduced. */
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next) rp->canReduce = LEMON_FALSE;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    struct action *ap;
 | 
						|
    for(ap=lemp->sorted[i]->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type==REDUCE ) ap->x.rp->canReduce = LEMON_TRUE;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    if( rp->canReduce ) continue;
 | 
						|
    ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,"This rule can not be reduced.\n");
 | 
						|
    lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Resolve a conflict between the two given actions.  If the
 | 
						|
** conflict can't be resolved, return non-zero.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** NO LONGER TRUE:
 | 
						|
**   To resolve a conflict, first look to see if either action
 | 
						|
**   is on an error rule.  In that case, take the action which
 | 
						|
**   is not associated with the error rule.  If neither or both
 | 
						|
**   actions are associated with an error rule, then try to
 | 
						|
**   use precedence to resolve the conflict.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** If either action is a SHIFT, then it must be apx.  This
 | 
						|
** function won't work if apx->type==REDUCE and apy->type==SHIFT.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int resolve_conflict(
 | 
						|
  struct action *apx,
 | 
						|
  struct action *apy
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *spx, *spy;
 | 
						|
  int errcnt = 0;
 | 
						|
  assert( apx->sp==apy->sp );  /* Otherwise there would be no conflict */
 | 
						|
  if( apx->type==SHIFT && apy->type==SHIFT ){
 | 
						|
    apy->type = SSCONFLICT;
 | 
						|
    errcnt++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( apx->type==SHIFT && apy->type==REDUCE ){
 | 
						|
    spx = apx->sp;
 | 
						|
    spy = apy->x.rp->precsym;
 | 
						|
    if( spy==0 || spx->prec<0 || spy->prec<0 ){
 | 
						|
      /* Not enough precedence information. */
 | 
						|
      apy->type = SRCONFLICT;
 | 
						|
      errcnt++;
 | 
						|
    }else if( spx->prec>spy->prec ){    /* higher precedence wins */
 | 
						|
      apy->type = RD_RESOLVED;
 | 
						|
    }else if( spx->prec<spy->prec ){
 | 
						|
      apx->type = SH_RESOLVED;
 | 
						|
    }else if( spx->prec==spy->prec && spx->assoc==RIGHT ){ /* Use operator */
 | 
						|
      apy->type = RD_RESOLVED;                             /* associativity */
 | 
						|
    }else if( spx->prec==spy->prec && spx->assoc==LEFT ){  /* to break tie */
 | 
						|
      apx->type = SH_RESOLVED;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      assert( spx->prec==spy->prec && spx->assoc==NONE );
 | 
						|
      apx->type = ERROR;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }else if( apx->type==REDUCE && apy->type==REDUCE ){
 | 
						|
    spx = apx->x.rp->precsym;
 | 
						|
    spy = apy->x.rp->precsym;
 | 
						|
    if( spx==0 || spy==0 || spx->prec<0 ||
 | 
						|
    spy->prec<0 || spx->prec==spy->prec ){
 | 
						|
      apy->type = RRCONFLICT;
 | 
						|
      errcnt++;
 | 
						|
    }else if( spx->prec>spy->prec ){
 | 
						|
      apy->type = RD_RESOLVED;
 | 
						|
    }else if( spx->prec<spy->prec ){
 | 
						|
      apx->type = RD_RESOLVED;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    assert(
 | 
						|
      apx->type==SH_RESOLVED ||
 | 
						|
      apx->type==RD_RESOLVED ||
 | 
						|
      apx->type==SSCONFLICT ||
 | 
						|
      apx->type==SRCONFLICT ||
 | 
						|
      apx->type==RRCONFLICT ||
 | 
						|
      apy->type==SH_RESOLVED ||
 | 
						|
      apy->type==RD_RESOLVED ||
 | 
						|
      apy->type==SSCONFLICT ||
 | 
						|
      apy->type==SRCONFLICT ||
 | 
						|
      apy->type==RRCONFLICT
 | 
						|
    );
 | 
						|
    /* The REDUCE/SHIFT case cannot happen because SHIFTs come before
 | 
						|
    ** REDUCEs on the list.  If we reach this point it must be because
 | 
						|
    ** the parser conflict had already been resolved. */
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return errcnt;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/********************* From the file "configlist.c" *************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Routines to processing a configuration list and building a state
 | 
						|
** in the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static struct config *freelist = 0;      /* List of free configurations */
 | 
						|
static struct config *current = 0;       /* Top of list of configurations */
 | 
						|
static struct config **currentend = 0;   /* Last on list of configs */
 | 
						|
static struct config *basis = 0;         /* Top of list of basis configs */
 | 
						|
static struct config **basisend = 0;     /* End of list of basis configs */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to a new configuration */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE struct config *newconfig(void){
 | 
						|
  return (struct config*)calloc(1, sizeof(struct config));
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The configuration "old" is no longer used */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void deleteconfig(struct config *old)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  old->next = freelist;
 | 
						|
  freelist = old;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Initialized the configuration list builder */
 | 
						|
void Configlist_init(void){
 | 
						|
  current = 0;
 | 
						|
  currentend = ¤t;
 | 
						|
  basis = 0;
 | 
						|
  basisend = &basis;
 | 
						|
  Configtable_init();
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Initialized the configuration list builder */
 | 
						|
void Configlist_reset(void){
 | 
						|
  current = 0;
 | 
						|
  currentend = ¤t;
 | 
						|
  basis = 0;
 | 
						|
  basisend = &basis;
 | 
						|
  Configtable_clear(0);
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Add another configuration to the configuration list */
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_add(
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp,    /* The rule */
 | 
						|
  int dot             /* Index into the RHS of the rule where the dot goes */
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp, model;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  assert( currentend!=0 );
 | 
						|
  model.rp = rp;
 | 
						|
  model.dot = dot;
 | 
						|
  cfp = Configtable_find(&model);
 | 
						|
  if( cfp==0 ){
 | 
						|
    cfp = newconfig();
 | 
						|
    cfp->rp = rp;
 | 
						|
    cfp->dot = dot;
 | 
						|
    cfp->fws = SetNew();
 | 
						|
    cfp->stp = 0;
 | 
						|
    cfp->fplp = cfp->bplp = 0;
 | 
						|
    cfp->next = 0;
 | 
						|
    cfp->bp = 0;
 | 
						|
    *currentend = cfp;
 | 
						|
    currentend = &cfp->next;
 | 
						|
    Configtable_insert(cfp);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return cfp;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Add a basis configuration to the configuration list */
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_addbasis(struct rule *rp, int dot)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp, model;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  assert( basisend!=0 );
 | 
						|
  assert( currentend!=0 );
 | 
						|
  model.rp = rp;
 | 
						|
  model.dot = dot;
 | 
						|
  cfp = Configtable_find(&model);
 | 
						|
  if( cfp==0 ){
 | 
						|
    cfp = newconfig();
 | 
						|
    cfp->rp = rp;
 | 
						|
    cfp->dot = dot;
 | 
						|
    cfp->fws = SetNew();
 | 
						|
    cfp->stp = 0;
 | 
						|
    cfp->fplp = cfp->bplp = 0;
 | 
						|
    cfp->next = 0;
 | 
						|
    cfp->bp = 0;
 | 
						|
    *currentend = cfp;
 | 
						|
    currentend = &cfp->next;
 | 
						|
    *basisend = cfp;
 | 
						|
    basisend = &cfp->bp;
 | 
						|
    Configtable_insert(cfp);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return cfp;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compute the closure of the configuration list */
 | 
						|
void Configlist_closure(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp, *newcfp;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp, *newrp;
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp, *xsp;
 | 
						|
  int i, dot;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  assert( currentend!=0 );
 | 
						|
  for(cfp=current; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
 | 
						|
    rp = cfp->rp;
 | 
						|
    dot = cfp->dot;
 | 
						|
    if( dot>=rp->nrhs ) continue;
 | 
						|
    sp = rp->rhs[dot];
 | 
						|
    if( sp->type==NONTERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
      if( sp->rule==0 && sp!=lemp->errsym ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->line,"Nonterminal \"%s\" has no rules.",
 | 
						|
          sp->name);
 | 
						|
        lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      for(newrp=sp->rule; newrp; newrp=newrp->nextlhs){
 | 
						|
        newcfp = Configlist_add(newrp,0);
 | 
						|
        for(i=dot+1; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
          xsp = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
          if( xsp->type==TERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
            SetAdd(newcfp->fws,xsp->index);
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
          }else if( xsp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
            int k;
 | 
						|
            for(k=0; k<xsp->nsubsym; k++){
 | 
						|
              SetAdd(newcfp->fws, xsp->subsym[k]->index);
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
          }else{
 | 
						|
            SetUnion(newcfp->fws,xsp->firstset);
 | 
						|
            if( xsp->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if( i==rp->nrhs ) Plink_add(&cfp->fplp,newcfp);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Sort the configuration list */
 | 
						|
void Configlist_sort(void){
 | 
						|
  current = (struct config*)msort((char*)current,(char**)&(current->next),
 | 
						|
                                  Configcmp);
 | 
						|
  currentend = 0;
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Sort the basis configuration list */
 | 
						|
void Configlist_sortbasis(void){
 | 
						|
  basis = (struct config*)msort((char*)current,(char**)&(current->bp),
 | 
						|
                                Configcmp);
 | 
						|
  basisend = 0;
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to the head of the configuration list and
 | 
						|
** reset the list */
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_return(void){
 | 
						|
  struct config *old;
 | 
						|
  old = current;
 | 
						|
  current = 0;
 | 
						|
  currentend = 0;
 | 
						|
  return old;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to the head of the configuration list and
 | 
						|
** reset the list */
 | 
						|
struct config *Configlist_basis(void){
 | 
						|
  struct config *old;
 | 
						|
  old = basis;
 | 
						|
  basis = 0;
 | 
						|
  basisend = 0;
 | 
						|
  return old;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Free all elements of the given configuration list */
 | 
						|
void Configlist_eat(struct config *cfp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct config *nextcfp;
 | 
						|
  for(; cfp; cfp=nextcfp){
 | 
						|
    nextcfp = cfp->next;
 | 
						|
    assert( cfp->fplp==0 );
 | 
						|
    assert( cfp->bplp==0 );
 | 
						|
    if( cfp->fws ) SetFree(cfp->fws);
 | 
						|
    deleteconfig(cfp);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/***************** From the file "error.c" *********************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Code for printing error message.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void ErrorMsg(const char *filename, int lineno, const char *format, ...){
 | 
						|
  va_list ap;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: ", filename, lineno);
 | 
						|
  va_start(ap, format);
 | 
						|
  vfprintf(stderr,format,ap);
 | 
						|
  va_end(ap);
 | 
						|
  fprintf(stderr, "\n");
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/**************** From the file "main.c" ************************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Main program file for the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Report an out-of-memory condition and abort.  This function
 | 
						|
** is used mostly by the "MemoryCheck" macro in struct.h
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void memory_error(void){
 | 
						|
  fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.  Aborting...\n");
 | 
						|
  exit(1);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static int nDefine = 0;      /* Number of -D options on the command line */
 | 
						|
static char **azDefine = 0;  /* Name of the -D macros */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* This routine is called with the argument to each -D command-line option.
 | 
						|
** Add the macro defined to the azDefine array.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static void handle_D_option(char *z){
 | 
						|
  char **paz;
 | 
						|
  nDefine++;
 | 
						|
  azDefine = (char **) realloc(azDefine, sizeof(azDefine[0])*nDefine);
 | 
						|
  if( azDefine==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"out of memory\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  paz = &azDefine[nDefine-1];
 | 
						|
  *paz = (char *) malloc( lemonStrlen(z)+1 );
 | 
						|
  if( *paz==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"out of memory\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lemon_strcpy(*paz, z);
 | 
						|
  for(z=*paz; *z && *z!='='; z++){}
 | 
						|
  *z = 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Rember the name of the output directory 
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static char *outputDir = NULL;
 | 
						|
static void handle_d_option(char *z){
 | 
						|
  outputDir = (char *) malloc( lemonStrlen(z)+1 );
 | 
						|
  if( outputDir==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"out of memory\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lemon_strcpy(outputDir, z);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static char *user_templatename = NULL;
 | 
						|
static void handle_T_option(char *z){
 | 
						|
  user_templatename = (char *) malloc( lemonStrlen(z)+1 );
 | 
						|
  if( user_templatename==0 ){
 | 
						|
    memory_error();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lemon_strcpy(user_templatename, z);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Merge together to lists of rules ordered by rule.iRule */
 | 
						|
static struct rule *Rule_merge(struct rule *pA, struct rule *pB){
 | 
						|
  struct rule *pFirst = 0;
 | 
						|
  struct rule **ppPrev = &pFirst;
 | 
						|
  while( pA && pB ){
 | 
						|
    if( pA->iRule<pB->iRule ){
 | 
						|
      *ppPrev = pA;
 | 
						|
      ppPrev = &pA->next;
 | 
						|
      pA = pA->next;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      *ppPrev = pB;
 | 
						|
      ppPrev = &pB->next;
 | 
						|
      pB = pB->next;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( pA ){
 | 
						|
    *ppPrev = pA;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    *ppPrev = pB;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return pFirst;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Sort a list of rules in order of increasing iRule value
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static struct rule *Rule_sort(struct rule *rp){
 | 
						|
  unsigned int i;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *pNext;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *x[32];
 | 
						|
  memset(x, 0, sizeof(x));
 | 
						|
  while( rp ){
 | 
						|
    pNext = rp->next;
 | 
						|
    rp->next = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<sizeof(x)/sizeof(x[0])-1 && x[i]; i++){
 | 
						|
      rp = Rule_merge(x[i], rp);
 | 
						|
      x[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    x[i] = rp;
 | 
						|
    rp = pNext;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  rp = 0;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<sizeof(x)/sizeof(x[0]); i++){
 | 
						|
    rp = Rule_merge(x[i], rp);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return rp;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* forward reference */
 | 
						|
static const char *minimum_size_type(int lwr, int upr, int *pnByte);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print a single line of the "Parser Stats" output
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static void stats_line(const char *zLabel, int iValue){
 | 
						|
  int nLabel = lemonStrlen(zLabel);
 | 
						|
  printf("  %s%.*s %5d\n", zLabel,
 | 
						|
         35-nLabel, "................................",
 | 
						|
         iValue);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The main program.  Parse the command line and do it... */
 | 
						|
int main(int argc, char **argv){
 | 
						|
  static int version = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int rpflag = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int basisflag = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int compress = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int quiet = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int statistics = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int mhflag = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int nolinenosflag = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int noResort = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int sqlFlag = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int printPP = 0;
 | 
						|
  
 | 
						|
  static struct s_options options[] = {
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "b", (char*)&basisflag, "Print only the basis in report."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "c", (char*)&compress, "Don't compress the action table."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FSTR, "d", (char*)&handle_d_option, "Output directory.  Default '.'"},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FSTR, "D", (char*)handle_D_option, "Define an %ifdef macro."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "E", (char*)&printPP, "Print input file after preprocessing."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FSTR, "f", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for -f compiler options.)"},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "g", (char*)&rpflag, "Print grammar without actions."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FSTR, "I", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for '-I' compiler options.)"},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "m", (char*)&mhflag, "Output a makeheaders compatible file."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "l", (char*)&nolinenosflag, "Do not print #line statements."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FSTR, "O", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for '-O' compiler options.)"},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "p", (char*)&showPrecedenceConflict,
 | 
						|
                    "Show conflicts resolved by precedence rules"},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "q", (char*)&quiet, "(Quiet) Don't print the report file."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "r", (char*)&noResort, "Do not sort or renumber states"},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "s", (char*)&statistics,
 | 
						|
                                   "Print parser stats to standard output."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "S", (char*)&sqlFlag,
 | 
						|
                    "Generate the *.sql file describing the parser tables."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG, "x", (char*)&version, "Print the version number."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FSTR, "T", (char*)handle_T_option, "Specify a template file."},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FSTR, "W", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for '-W' compiler options.)"},
 | 
						|
    {OPT_FLAG,0,0,0}
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  int exitcode;
 | 
						|
  struct lemon lem;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  (void)argc;
 | 
						|
  OptInit(argv,options,stderr);
 | 
						|
  if( version ){
 | 
						|
     printf("Lemon version 1.0\n");
 | 
						|
     exit(0);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( OptNArgs()!=1 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Exactly one filename argument is required.\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  memset(&lem, 0, sizeof(lem));
 | 
						|
  lem.errorcnt = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Initialize the machine */
 | 
						|
  Strsafe_init();
 | 
						|
  Symbol_init();
 | 
						|
  State_init();
 | 
						|
  lem.argv0 = argv[0];
 | 
						|
  lem.filename = OptArg(0);
 | 
						|
  lem.basisflag = basisflag;
 | 
						|
  lem.nolinenosflag = nolinenosflag;
 | 
						|
  lem.printPreprocessed = printPP;
 | 
						|
  Symbol_new("$");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Parse the input file */
 | 
						|
  Parse(&lem);
 | 
						|
  if( lem.printPreprocessed || lem.errorcnt ) exit(lem.errorcnt);
 | 
						|
  if( lem.nrule==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Empty grammar.\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lem.errsym = Symbol_find("error");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Count and index the symbols of the grammar */
 | 
						|
  Symbol_new("{default}");
 | 
						|
  lem.nsymbol = Symbol_count();
 | 
						|
  lem.symbols = Symbol_arrayof();
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lem.nsymbol; i++) lem.symbols[i]->index = i;
 | 
						|
  qsort(lem.symbols,lem.nsymbol,sizeof(struct symbol*), Symbolcmpp);
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lem.nsymbol; i++) lem.symbols[i]->index = i;
 | 
						|
  while( lem.symbols[i-1]->type==MULTITERMINAL ){ i--; }
 | 
						|
  assert( strcmp(lem.symbols[i-1]->name,"{default}")==0 );
 | 
						|
  lem.nsymbol = i - 1;
 | 
						|
  for(i=1; ISUPPER(lem.symbols[i]->name[0]); i++);
 | 
						|
  lem.nterminal = i;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Assign sequential rule numbers.  Start with 0.  Put rules that have no
 | 
						|
  ** reduce action C-code associated with them last, so that the switch()
 | 
						|
  ** statement that selects reduction actions will have a smaller jump table.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0, rp=lem.rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    rp->iRule = rp->code ? i++ : -1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lem.nruleWithAction = i;
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lem.rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    if( rp->iRule<0 ) rp->iRule = i++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lem.startRule = lem.rule;
 | 
						|
  lem.rule = Rule_sort(lem.rule);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate a reprint of the grammar, if requested on the command line */
 | 
						|
  if( rpflag ){
 | 
						|
    Reprint(&lem);
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    /* Initialize the size for all follow and first sets */
 | 
						|
    SetSize(lem.nterminal+1);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Find the precedence for every production rule (that has one) */
 | 
						|
    FindRulePrecedences(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Compute the lambda-nonterminals and the first-sets for every
 | 
						|
    ** nonterminal */
 | 
						|
    FindFirstSets(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Compute all LR(0) states.  Also record follow-set propagation
 | 
						|
    ** links so that the follow-set can be computed later */
 | 
						|
    lem.nstate = 0;
 | 
						|
    FindStates(&lem);
 | 
						|
    lem.sorted = State_arrayof();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Tie up loose ends on the propagation links */
 | 
						|
    FindLinks(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Compute the follow set of every reducible configuration */
 | 
						|
    FindFollowSets(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Compute the action tables */
 | 
						|
    FindActions(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Compress the action tables */
 | 
						|
    if( compress==0 ) CompressTables(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Reorder and renumber the states so that states with fewer choices
 | 
						|
    ** occur at the end.  This is an optimization that helps make the
 | 
						|
    ** generated parser tables smaller. */
 | 
						|
    if( noResort==0 ) ResortStates(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Generate a report of the parser generated.  (the "y.output" file) */
 | 
						|
    if( !quiet ) ReportOutput(&lem);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Generate the source code for the parser */
 | 
						|
    ReportTable(&lem, mhflag, sqlFlag);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Produce a header file for use by the scanner.  (This step is
 | 
						|
    ** omitted if the "-m" option is used because makeheaders will
 | 
						|
    ** generate the file for us.) */
 | 
						|
    if( !mhflag ) ReportHeader(&lem);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( statistics ){
 | 
						|
    printf("Parser statistics:\n");
 | 
						|
    stats_line("terminal symbols", lem.nterminal);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("non-terminal symbols", lem.nsymbol - lem.nterminal);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("total symbols", lem.nsymbol);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("rules", lem.nrule);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("states", lem.nxstate);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("conflicts", lem.nconflict);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("action table entries", lem.nactiontab);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("lookahead table entries", lem.nlookaheadtab);
 | 
						|
    stats_line("total table size (bytes)", lem.tablesize);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lem.nconflict > 0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"%d parsing conflicts.\n",lem.nconflict);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* return 0 on success, 1 on failure. */
 | 
						|
  exitcode = ((lem.errorcnt > 0) || (lem.nconflict > 0)) ? 1 : 0;
 | 
						|
  exit(exitcode);
 | 
						|
  return (exitcode);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/******************** From the file "msort.c" *******************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** A generic merge-sort program.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** USAGE:
 | 
						|
** Let "ptr" be a pointer to some structure which is at the head of
 | 
						|
** a null-terminated list.  Then to sort the list call:
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
**     ptr = msort(ptr,&(ptr->next),cmpfnc);
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** In the above, "cmpfnc" is a pointer to a function which compares
 | 
						|
** two instances of the structure and returns an integer, as in
 | 
						|
** strcmp.  The second argument is a pointer to the pointer to the
 | 
						|
** second element of the linked list.  This address is used to compute
 | 
						|
** the offset to the "next" field within the structure.  The offset to
 | 
						|
** the "next" field must be constant for all structures in the list.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** The function returns a new pointer which is the head of the list
 | 
						|
** after sorting.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** ALGORITHM:
 | 
						|
** Merge-sort.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Return a pointer to the next structure in the linked list.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
#define NEXT(A) (*(char**)(((char*)A)+offset))
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Inputs:
 | 
						|
**   a:       A sorted, null-terminated linked list.  (May be null).
 | 
						|
**   b:       A sorted, null-terminated linked list.  (May be null).
 | 
						|
**   cmp:     A pointer to the comparison function.
 | 
						|
**   offset:  Offset in the structure to the "next" field.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Return Value:
 | 
						|
**   A pointer to the head of a sorted list containing the elements
 | 
						|
**   of both a and b.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Side effects:
 | 
						|
**   The "next" pointers for elements in the lists a and b are
 | 
						|
**   changed.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static char *merge(
 | 
						|
  char *a,
 | 
						|
  char *b,
 | 
						|
  int (*cmp)(const char*,const char*),
 | 
						|
  int offset
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  char *ptr, *head;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( a==0 ){
 | 
						|
    head = b;
 | 
						|
  }else if( b==0 ){
 | 
						|
    head = a;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    if( (*cmp)(a,b)<=0 ){
 | 
						|
      ptr = a;
 | 
						|
      a = NEXT(a);
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      ptr = b;
 | 
						|
      b = NEXT(b);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    head = ptr;
 | 
						|
    while( a && b ){
 | 
						|
      if( (*cmp)(a,b)<=0 ){
 | 
						|
        NEXT(ptr) = a;
 | 
						|
        ptr = a;
 | 
						|
        a = NEXT(a);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        NEXT(ptr) = b;
 | 
						|
        ptr = b;
 | 
						|
        b = NEXT(b);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( a ) NEXT(ptr) = a;
 | 
						|
    else    NEXT(ptr) = b;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return head;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Inputs:
 | 
						|
**   list:      Pointer to a singly-linked list of structures.
 | 
						|
**   next:      Pointer to pointer to the second element of the list.
 | 
						|
**   cmp:       A comparison function.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Return Value:
 | 
						|
**   A pointer to the head of a sorted list containing the elements
 | 
						|
**   originally in list.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Side effects:
 | 
						|
**   The "next" pointers for elements in list are changed.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
#define LISTSIZE 30
 | 
						|
static char *msort(
 | 
						|
  char *list,
 | 
						|
  char **next,
 | 
						|
  int (*cmp)(const char*,const char*)
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  unsigned long offset;
 | 
						|
  char *ep;
 | 
						|
  char *set[LISTSIZE];
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  offset = (unsigned long)((char*)next - (char*)list);
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<LISTSIZE; i++) set[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
  while( list ){
 | 
						|
    ep = list;
 | 
						|
    list = NEXT(list);
 | 
						|
    NEXT(ep) = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<LISTSIZE-1 && set[i]!=0; i++){
 | 
						|
      ep = merge(ep,set[i],cmp,offset);
 | 
						|
      set[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    set[i] = ep;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  ep = 0;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<LISTSIZE; i++) if( set[i] ) ep = merge(set[i],ep,cmp,offset);
 | 
						|
  return ep;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/************************ From the file "option.c" **************************/
 | 
						|
static char **g_argv;
 | 
						|
static struct s_options *op;
 | 
						|
static FILE *errstream;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#define ISOPT(X) ((X)[0]=='-'||(X)[0]=='+'||strchr((X),'=')!=0)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Print the command line with a carrot pointing to the k-th character
 | 
						|
** of the n-th field.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static void errline(int n, int k, FILE *err)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int spcnt, i;
 | 
						|
  if( g_argv[0] ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(err,"%s",g_argv[0]);
 | 
						|
    spcnt = lemonStrlen(g_argv[0]) + 1;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    spcnt = 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=1; i<n && g_argv[i]; i++){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(err," %s",g_argv[i]);
 | 
						|
    spcnt += lemonStrlen(g_argv[i])+1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  spcnt += k;
 | 
						|
  for(; g_argv[i]; i++) fprintf(err," %s",g_argv[i]);
 | 
						|
  if( spcnt<20 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(err,"\n%*s^-- here\n",spcnt,"");
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    fprintf(err,"\n%*shere --^\n",spcnt-7,"");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Return the index of the N-th non-switch argument.  Return -1
 | 
						|
** if N is out of range.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int argindex(int n)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  int dashdash = 0;
 | 
						|
  if( g_argv!=0 && *g_argv!=0 ){
 | 
						|
    for(i=1; g_argv[i]; i++){
 | 
						|
      if( dashdash || !ISOPT(g_argv[i]) ){
 | 
						|
        if( n==0 ) return i;
 | 
						|
        n--;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( strcmp(g_argv[i],"--")==0 ) dashdash = 1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return -1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static char emsg[] = "Command line syntax error: ";
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Process a flag command line argument.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int handleflags(int i, FILE *err)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int v;
 | 
						|
  int errcnt = 0;
 | 
						|
  int j;
 | 
						|
  for(j=0; op[j].label; j++){
 | 
						|
    if( strncmp(&g_argv[i][1],op[j].label,lemonStrlen(op[j].label))==0 ) break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  v = g_argv[i][0]=='-' ? 1 : 0;
 | 
						|
  if( op[j].label==0 ){
 | 
						|
    if( err ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(err,"%sundefined option.\n",emsg);
 | 
						|
      errline(i,1,err);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    errcnt++;
 | 
						|
  }else if( op[j].arg==0 ){
 | 
						|
    /* Ignore this option */
 | 
						|
  }else if( op[j].type==OPT_FLAG ){
 | 
						|
    *((int*)op[j].arg) = v;
 | 
						|
  }else if( op[j].type==OPT_FFLAG ){
 | 
						|
    (*(void(*)(int))(op[j].arg))(v);
 | 
						|
  }else if( op[j].type==OPT_FSTR ){
 | 
						|
    (*(void(*)(char *))(op[j].arg))(&g_argv[i][2]);
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    if( err ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(err,"%smissing argument on switch.\n",emsg);
 | 
						|
      errline(i,1,err);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    errcnt++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return errcnt;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Process a command line switch which has an argument.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int handleswitch(int i, FILE *err)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int lv = 0;
 | 
						|
  double dv = 0.0;
 | 
						|
  char *sv = 0, *end;
 | 
						|
  char *cp;
 | 
						|
  int j;
 | 
						|
  int errcnt = 0;
 | 
						|
  cp = strchr(g_argv[i],'=');
 | 
						|
  assert( cp!=0 );
 | 
						|
  *cp = 0;
 | 
						|
  for(j=0; op[j].label; j++){
 | 
						|
    if( strcmp(g_argv[i],op[j].label)==0 ) break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  *cp = '=';
 | 
						|
  if( op[j].label==0 ){
 | 
						|
    if( err ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(err,"%sundefined option.\n",emsg);
 | 
						|
      errline(i,0,err);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    errcnt++;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    cp++;
 | 
						|
    switch( op[j].type ){
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FLAG:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FFLAG:
 | 
						|
        if( err ){
 | 
						|
          fprintf(err,"%soption requires an argument.\n",emsg);
 | 
						|
          errline(i,0,err);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        errcnt++;
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_DBL:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FDBL:
 | 
						|
        dv = strtod(cp,&end);
 | 
						|
        if( *end ){
 | 
						|
          if( err ){
 | 
						|
            fprintf(err,
 | 
						|
               "%sillegal character in floating-point argument.\n",emsg);
 | 
						|
            errline(i,(int)((char*)end-(char*)g_argv[i]),err);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          errcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_INT:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FINT:
 | 
						|
        lv = strtol(cp,&end,0);
 | 
						|
        if( *end ){
 | 
						|
          if( err ){
 | 
						|
            fprintf(err,"%sillegal character in integer argument.\n",emsg);
 | 
						|
            errline(i,(int)((char*)end-(char*)g_argv[i]),err);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          errcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_STR:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FSTR:
 | 
						|
        sv = cp;
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    switch( op[j].type ){
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FLAG:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FFLAG:
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_DBL:
 | 
						|
        *(double*)(op[j].arg) = dv;
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FDBL:
 | 
						|
        (*(void(*)(double))(op[j].arg))(dv);
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_INT:
 | 
						|
        *(int*)(op[j].arg) = lv;
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FINT:
 | 
						|
        (*(void(*)(int))(op[j].arg))((int)lv);
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_STR:
 | 
						|
        *(char**)(op[j].arg) = sv;
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FSTR:
 | 
						|
        (*(void(*)(char *))(op[j].arg))(sv);
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return errcnt;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int OptInit(char **a, struct s_options *o, FILE *err)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int errcnt = 0;
 | 
						|
  g_argv = a;
 | 
						|
  op = o;
 | 
						|
  errstream = err;
 | 
						|
  if( g_argv && *g_argv && op ){
 | 
						|
    int i;
 | 
						|
    for(i=1; g_argv[i]; i++){
 | 
						|
      if( g_argv[i][0]=='+' || g_argv[i][0]=='-' ){
 | 
						|
        errcnt += handleflags(i,err);
 | 
						|
      }else if( strchr(g_argv[i],'=') ){
 | 
						|
        errcnt += handleswitch(i,err);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( errcnt>0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(err,"Valid command line options for \"%s\" are:\n",*a);
 | 
						|
    OptPrint();
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int OptNArgs(void){
 | 
						|
  int cnt = 0;
 | 
						|
  int dashdash = 0;
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  if( g_argv!=0 && g_argv[0]!=0 ){
 | 
						|
    for(i=1; g_argv[i]; i++){
 | 
						|
      if( dashdash || !ISOPT(g_argv[i]) ) cnt++;
 | 
						|
      if( strcmp(g_argv[i],"--")==0 ) dashdash = 1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return cnt;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
char *OptArg(int n)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  i = argindex(n);
 | 
						|
  return i>=0 ? g_argv[i] : 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void OptErr(int n)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  i = argindex(n);
 | 
						|
  if( i>=0 ) errline(i,0,errstream);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void OptPrint(void){
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  int max, len;
 | 
						|
  max = 0;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; op[i].label; i++){
 | 
						|
    len = lemonStrlen(op[i].label) + 1;
 | 
						|
    switch( op[i].type ){
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FLAG:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FFLAG:
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_INT:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FINT:
 | 
						|
        len += 9;       /* length of "<integer>" */
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_DBL:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FDBL:
 | 
						|
        len += 6;       /* length of "<real>" */
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_STR:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FSTR:
 | 
						|
        len += 8;       /* length of "<string>" */
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( len>max ) max = len;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; op[i].label; i++){
 | 
						|
    switch( op[i].type ){
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FLAG:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FFLAG:
 | 
						|
        fprintf(errstream,"  -%-*s  %s\n",max,op[i].label,op[i].message);
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_INT:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FINT:
 | 
						|
        fprintf(errstream,"  -%s<integer>%*s  %s\n",op[i].label,
 | 
						|
          (int)(max-lemonStrlen(op[i].label)-9),"",op[i].message);
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_DBL:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FDBL:
 | 
						|
        fprintf(errstream,"  -%s<real>%*s  %s\n",op[i].label,
 | 
						|
          (int)(max-lemonStrlen(op[i].label)-6),"",op[i].message);
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      case OPT_STR:
 | 
						|
      case OPT_FSTR:
 | 
						|
        fprintf(errstream,"  -%s<string>%*s  %s\n",op[i].label,
 | 
						|
          (int)(max-lemonStrlen(op[i].label)-8),"",op[i].message);
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/*********************** From the file "parse.c" ****************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Input file parser for the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The state of the parser */
 | 
						|
enum e_state {
 | 
						|
  INITIALIZE,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_ARROW,
 | 
						|
  IN_RHS,
 | 
						|
  LHS_ALIAS_1,
 | 
						|
  LHS_ALIAS_2,
 | 
						|
  LHS_ALIAS_3,
 | 
						|
  RHS_ALIAS_1,
 | 
						|
  RHS_ALIAS_2,
 | 
						|
  PRECEDENCE_MARK_1,
 | 
						|
  PRECEDENCE_MARK_2,
 | 
						|
  RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR,
 | 
						|
  RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_DESTRUCTOR_SYMBOL,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_DATATYPE_SYMBOL,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_FALLBACK_ID,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_WILDCARD_ID,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_CLASS_ID,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_CLASS_TOKEN,
 | 
						|
  WAITING_FOR_TOKEN_NAME
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
struct pstate {
 | 
						|
  char *filename;       /* Name of the input file */
 | 
						|
  int tokenlineno;      /* Linenumber at which current token starts */
 | 
						|
  int errorcnt;         /* Number of errors so far */
 | 
						|
  char *tokenstart;     /* Text of current token */
 | 
						|
  struct lemon *gp;     /* Global state vector */
 | 
						|
  enum e_state state;        /* The state of the parser */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *fallback;   /* The fallback token */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *tkclass;    /* Token class symbol */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *lhs;        /* Left-hand side of current rule */
 | 
						|
  const char *lhsalias;      /* Alias for the LHS */
 | 
						|
  int nrhs;                  /* Number of right-hand side symbols seen */
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *rhs[MAXRHS];  /* RHS symbols */
 | 
						|
  const char *alias[MAXRHS]; /* Aliases for each RHS symbol (or NULL) */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *prevrule;     /* Previous rule parsed */
 | 
						|
  const char *declkeyword;   /* Keyword of a declaration */
 | 
						|
  char **declargslot;        /* Where the declaration argument should be put */
 | 
						|
  int insertLineMacro;       /* Add #line before declaration insert */
 | 
						|
  int *decllinenoslot;       /* Where to write declaration line number */
 | 
						|
  enum e_assoc declassoc;    /* Assign this association to decl arguments */
 | 
						|
  int preccounter;           /* Assign this precedence to decl arguments */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *firstrule;    /* Pointer to first rule in the grammar */
 | 
						|
  struct rule *lastrule;     /* Pointer to the most recently parsed rule */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Parse a single token */
 | 
						|
static void parseonetoken(struct pstate *psp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  const char *x;
 | 
						|
  x = Strsafe(psp->tokenstart);     /* Save the token permanently */
 | 
						|
#if 0
 | 
						|
  printf("%s:%d: Token=[%s] state=%d\n",psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
    x,psp->state);
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
  switch( psp->state ){
 | 
						|
    case INITIALIZE:
 | 
						|
      psp->prevrule = 0;
 | 
						|
      psp->preccounter = 0;
 | 
						|
      psp->firstrule = psp->lastrule = 0;
 | 
						|
      psp->gp->nrule = 0;
 | 
						|
      /* fall through */
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='%' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD;
 | 
						|
      }else if( ISLOWER(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        psp->lhs = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
        psp->nrhs = 0;
 | 
						|
        psp->lhsalias = 0;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_ARROW;
 | 
						|
      }else if( x[0]=='{' ){
 | 
						|
        if( psp->prevrule==0 ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "There is no prior rule upon which to attach the code "
 | 
						|
            "fragment which begins on this line.");
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }else if( psp->prevrule->code!=0 ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Code fragment beginning on this line is not the first "
 | 
						|
            "to follow the previous rule.");
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x, "{NEVER-REDUCE")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->prevrule->neverReduce = 1;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          psp->prevrule->line = psp->tokenlineno;
 | 
						|
          psp->prevrule->code = &x[1];
 | 
						|
          psp->prevrule->noCode = 0;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }else if( x[0]=='[' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = PRECEDENCE_MARK_1;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Token \"%s\" should be either \"%%\" or a nonterminal name.",
 | 
						|
          x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case PRECEDENCE_MARK_1:
 | 
						|
      if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "The precedence symbol must be a terminal.");
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }else if( psp->prevrule==0 ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "There is no prior rule to assign precedence \"[%s]\".",x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }else if( psp->prevrule->precsym!=0 ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Precedence mark on this line is not the first "
 | 
						|
          "to follow the previous rule.");
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        psp->prevrule->precsym = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      psp->state = PRECEDENCE_MARK_2;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case PRECEDENCE_MARK_2:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]!=']' ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Missing \"]\" on precedence mark.");
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_ARROW:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]==':' && x[1]==':' && x[2]=='=' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = IN_RHS;
 | 
						|
      }else if( x[0]=='(' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = LHS_ALIAS_1;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Expected to see a \":\" following the LHS symbol \"%s\".",
 | 
						|
          psp->lhs->name);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case LHS_ALIAS_1:
 | 
						|
      if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        psp->lhsalias = x;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = LHS_ALIAS_2;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "\"%s\" is not a valid alias for the LHS \"%s\"\n",
 | 
						|
          x,psp->lhs->name);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case LHS_ALIAS_2:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]==')' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = LHS_ALIAS_3;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Missing \")\" following LHS alias name \"%s\".",psp->lhsalias);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case LHS_ALIAS_3:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]==':' && x[1]==':' && x[2]=='=' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = IN_RHS;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Missing \"->\" following: \"%s(%s)\".",
 | 
						|
           psp->lhs->name,psp->lhsalias);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case IN_RHS:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='.' ){
 | 
						|
        struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
        rp = (struct rule *)calloc( sizeof(struct rule) +
 | 
						|
             sizeof(struct symbol*)*psp->nrhs + sizeof(char*)*psp->nrhs, 1);
 | 
						|
        if( rp==0 ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Can't allocate enough memory for this rule.");
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
          psp->prevrule = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          int i;
 | 
						|
          rp->ruleline = psp->tokenlineno;
 | 
						|
          rp->rhs = (struct symbol**)&rp[1];
 | 
						|
          rp->rhsalias = (const char**)&(rp->rhs[psp->nrhs]);
 | 
						|
          for(i=0; i<psp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
            rp->rhs[i] = psp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
            rp->rhsalias[i] = psp->alias[i];
 | 
						|
            if( rp->rhsalias[i]!=0 ){ rp->rhs[i]->bContent = 1; }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          rp->lhs = psp->lhs;
 | 
						|
          rp->lhsalias = psp->lhsalias;
 | 
						|
          rp->nrhs = psp->nrhs;
 | 
						|
          rp->code = 0;
 | 
						|
          rp->noCode = 1;
 | 
						|
          rp->precsym = 0;
 | 
						|
          rp->index = psp->gp->nrule++;
 | 
						|
          rp->nextlhs = rp->lhs->rule;
 | 
						|
          rp->lhs->rule = rp;
 | 
						|
          rp->next = 0;
 | 
						|
          if( psp->firstrule==0 ){
 | 
						|
            psp->firstrule = psp->lastrule = rp;
 | 
						|
          }else{
 | 
						|
            psp->lastrule->next = rp;
 | 
						|
            psp->lastrule = rp;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          psp->prevrule = rp;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      }else if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        if( psp->nrhs>=MAXRHS ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Too many symbols on RHS of rule beginning at \"%s\".",
 | 
						|
            x);
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          psp->rhs[psp->nrhs] = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
          psp->alias[psp->nrhs] = 0;
 | 
						|
          psp->nrhs++;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }else if( (x[0]=='|' || x[0]=='/') && psp->nrhs>0 && ISUPPER(x[1]) ){
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *msp = psp->rhs[psp->nrhs-1];
 | 
						|
        if( msp->type!=MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
          struct symbol *origsp = msp;
 | 
						|
          msp = (struct symbol *) calloc(1,sizeof(*msp));
 | 
						|
          memset(msp, 0, sizeof(*msp));
 | 
						|
          msp->type = MULTITERMINAL;
 | 
						|
          msp->nsubsym = 1;
 | 
						|
          msp->subsym = (struct symbol **) calloc(1,sizeof(struct symbol*));
 | 
						|
          msp->subsym[0] = origsp;
 | 
						|
          msp->name = origsp->name;
 | 
						|
          psp->rhs[psp->nrhs-1] = msp;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        msp->nsubsym++;
 | 
						|
        msp->subsym = (struct symbol **) realloc(msp->subsym,
 | 
						|
          sizeof(struct symbol*)*msp->nsubsym);
 | 
						|
        msp->subsym[msp->nsubsym-1] = Symbol_new(&x[1]);
 | 
						|
        if( ISLOWER(x[1]) || ISLOWER(msp->subsym[0]->name[0]) ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Cannot form a compound containing a non-terminal");
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }else if( x[0]=='(' && psp->nrhs>0 ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RHS_ALIAS_1;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Illegal character on RHS of rule: \"%s\".",x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case RHS_ALIAS_1:
 | 
						|
      if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        psp->alias[psp->nrhs-1] = x;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RHS_ALIAS_2;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "\"%s\" is not a valid alias for the RHS symbol \"%s\"\n",
 | 
						|
          x,psp->rhs[psp->nrhs-1]->name);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case RHS_ALIAS_2:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]==')' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = IN_RHS;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Missing \")\" following LHS alias name \"%s\".",psp->lhsalias);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD:
 | 
						|
      if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        psp->declkeyword = x;
 | 
						|
        psp->declargslot = 0;
 | 
						|
        psp->decllinenoslot = 0;
 | 
						|
        psp->insertLineMacro = 1;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG;
 | 
						|
        if( strcmp(x,"name")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->name);
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"include")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->include);
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"code")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->extracode);
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_destructor")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &psp->gp->tokendest;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"default_destructor")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &psp->gp->vardest;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_prefix")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &psp->gp->tokenprefix;
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"syntax_error")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->error);
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"parse_accept")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->accept);
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"parse_failure")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->failure);
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"stack_overflow")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->overflow);
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"extra_argument")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->arg);
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"extra_context")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->ctx);
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_type")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->tokentype);
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"default_type")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->vartype);
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"stack_size")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->stacksize);
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"start_symbol")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->start);
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"left")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->preccounter++;
 | 
						|
          psp->declassoc = LEFT;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"right")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->preccounter++;
 | 
						|
          psp->declassoc = RIGHT;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"nonassoc")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->preccounter++;
 | 
						|
          psp->declassoc = NONE;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"destructor")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DESTRUCTOR_SYMBOL;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"type")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DATATYPE_SYMBOL;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"fallback")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->fallback = 0;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_FALLBACK_ID;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"token")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_TOKEN_NAME;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"wildcard")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_WILDCARD_ID;
 | 
						|
        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_class")==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_CLASS_ID;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Unknown declaration keyword: \"%%%s\".",x);
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Illegal declaration keyword: \"%s\".",x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_DESTRUCTOR_SYMBOL:
 | 
						|
      if( !ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Symbol name missing after %%destructor keyword");
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
        psp->declargslot = &sp->destructor;
 | 
						|
        psp->decllinenoslot = &sp->destLineno;
 | 
						|
        psp->insertLineMacro = 1;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_DATATYPE_SYMBOL:
 | 
						|
      if( !ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Symbol name missing after %%type keyword");
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_find(x);
 | 
						|
        if((sp) && (sp->datatype)){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Symbol %%type \"%s\" already defined", x);
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          if (!sp){
 | 
						|
            sp = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          psp->declargslot = &sp->datatype;
 | 
						|
          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
 | 
						|
          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='.' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      }else if( ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp;
 | 
						|
        sp = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
        if( sp->prec>=0 ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Symbol \"%s\" has already be given a precedence.",x);
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          sp->prec = psp->preccounter;
 | 
						|
          sp->assoc = psp->declassoc;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Can't assign a precedence to \"%s\".",x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='{' || x[0]=='\"' || ISALNUM(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        const char *zOld, *zNew;
 | 
						|
        char *zBuf, *z;
 | 
						|
        int nOld, n, nLine = 0, nNew, nBack;
 | 
						|
        int addLineMacro;
 | 
						|
        char zLine[50];
 | 
						|
        zNew = x;
 | 
						|
        if( zNew[0]=='"' || zNew[0]=='{' ) zNew++;
 | 
						|
        nNew = lemonStrlen(zNew);
 | 
						|
        if( *psp->declargslot ){
 | 
						|
          zOld = *psp->declargslot;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          zOld = "";
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        nOld = lemonStrlen(zOld);
 | 
						|
        n = nOld + nNew + 20;
 | 
						|
        addLineMacro = !psp->gp->nolinenosflag
 | 
						|
                       && psp->insertLineMacro
 | 
						|
                       && psp->tokenlineno>1
 | 
						|
                       && (psp->decllinenoslot==0 || psp->decllinenoslot[0]!=0);
 | 
						|
        if( addLineMacro ){
 | 
						|
          for(z=psp->filename, nBack=0; *z; z++){
 | 
						|
            if( *z=='\\' ) nBack++;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          lemon_sprintf(zLine, "#line %d ", psp->tokenlineno);
 | 
						|
          nLine = lemonStrlen(zLine);
 | 
						|
          n += nLine + lemonStrlen(psp->filename) + nBack;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        *psp->declargslot = (char *) realloc(*psp->declargslot, n);
 | 
						|
        zBuf = *psp->declargslot + nOld;
 | 
						|
        if( addLineMacro ){
 | 
						|
          if( nOld && zBuf[-1]!='\n' ){
 | 
						|
            *(zBuf++) = '\n';
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          memcpy(zBuf, zLine, nLine);
 | 
						|
          zBuf += nLine;
 | 
						|
          *(zBuf++) = '"';
 | 
						|
          for(z=psp->filename; *z; z++){
 | 
						|
            if( *z=='\\' ){
 | 
						|
              *(zBuf++) = '\\';
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
            *(zBuf++) = *z;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          *(zBuf++) = '"';
 | 
						|
          *(zBuf++) = '\n';
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if( psp->decllinenoslot && psp->decllinenoslot[0]==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->decllinenoslot[0] = psp->tokenlineno;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        memcpy(zBuf, zNew, nNew);
 | 
						|
        zBuf += nNew;
 | 
						|
        *zBuf = 0;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Illegal argument to %%%s: %s",psp->declkeyword,x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_FALLBACK_ID:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='.' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      }else if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "%%fallback argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
        if( psp->fallback==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->fallback = sp;
 | 
						|
        }else if( sp->fallback ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "More than one fallback assigned to token %s", x);
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          sp->fallback = psp->fallback;
 | 
						|
          psp->gp->has_fallback = 1;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_TOKEN_NAME:
 | 
						|
      /* Tokens do not have to be declared before use.  But they can be
 | 
						|
      ** in order to control their assigned integer number.  The number for
 | 
						|
      ** each token is assigned when it is first seen.  So by including
 | 
						|
      **
 | 
						|
      **     %token ONE TWO THREE.
 | 
						|
      **
 | 
						|
      ** early in the grammar file, that assigns small consecutive values
 | 
						|
      ** to each of the tokens ONE TWO and THREE.
 | 
						|
      */
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='.' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      }else if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "%%token argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        (void)Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_WILDCARD_ID:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='.' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      }else if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "%%wildcard argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
        if( psp->gp->wildcard==0 ){
 | 
						|
          psp->gp->wildcard = sp;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
            "Extra wildcard to token: %s", x);
 | 
						|
          psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_CLASS_ID:
 | 
						|
      if( !ISLOWER(x[0]) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "%%token_class must be followed by an identifier: %s", x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
     }else if( Symbol_find(x) ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "Symbol \"%s\" already used", x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        psp->tkclass = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
        psp->tkclass->type = MULTITERMINAL;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_CLASS_TOKEN;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case WAITING_FOR_CLASS_TOKEN:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='.' ){
 | 
						|
        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      }else if( ISUPPER(x[0]) || ((x[0]=='|' || x[0]=='/') && ISUPPER(x[1])) ){
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *msp = psp->tkclass;
 | 
						|
        msp->nsubsym++;
 | 
						|
        msp->subsym = (struct symbol **) realloc(msp->subsym,
 | 
						|
          sizeof(struct symbol*)*msp->nsubsym);
 | 
						|
        if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ) x++;
 | 
						|
        msp->subsym[msp->nsubsym-1] = Symbol_new(x);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "%%token_class argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
 | 
						|
        psp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR:
 | 
						|
/*      if( x[0]=='.' ) psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
**      break; */
 | 
						|
    case RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR:
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='.' ) psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
 | 
						|
      if( x[0]=='%' ) psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The text in the input is part of the argument to an %ifdef or %ifndef.
 | 
						|
** Evaluate the text as a boolean expression.  Return true or false.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int eval_preprocessor_boolean(char *z, int lineno){
 | 
						|
  int neg = 0;
 | 
						|
  int res = 0;
 | 
						|
  int okTerm = 1;
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; z[i]!=0; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( ISSPACE(z[i]) ) continue;
 | 
						|
    if( z[i]=='!' ){
 | 
						|
      if( !okTerm ) goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
      neg = !neg;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( z[i]=='|' && z[i+1]=='|' ){
 | 
						|
      if( okTerm ) goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
      if( res ) return 1;
 | 
						|
      i++;
 | 
						|
      okTerm = 1;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( z[i]=='&' && z[i+1]=='&' ){
 | 
						|
      if( okTerm ) goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
      if( !res ) return 0;
 | 
						|
      i++;
 | 
						|
      okTerm = 1;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( z[i]=='(' ){
 | 
						|
      int k;
 | 
						|
      int n = 1;
 | 
						|
      if( !okTerm ) goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
      for(k=i+1; z[k]; k++){
 | 
						|
        if( z[k]==')' ){
 | 
						|
          n--;
 | 
						|
          if( n==0 ){
 | 
						|
            z[k] = 0;
 | 
						|
            res = eval_preprocessor_boolean(&z[i+1], -1);
 | 
						|
            z[k] = ')';
 | 
						|
            if( res<0 ){
 | 
						|
              i = i-res;
 | 
						|
              goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
            i = k;
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }else if( z[k]=='(' ){
 | 
						|
          n++;
 | 
						|
        }else if( z[k]==0 ){
 | 
						|
          i = k;
 | 
						|
          goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( neg ){
 | 
						|
        res = !res;
 | 
						|
        neg = 0;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      okTerm = 0;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( ISALPHA(z[i]) ){
 | 
						|
      int j, k, n;
 | 
						|
      if( !okTerm ) goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
      for(k=i+1; ISALNUM(z[k]) || z[k]=='_'; k++){}
 | 
						|
      n = k - i;
 | 
						|
      res = 0;
 | 
						|
      for(j=0; j<nDefine; j++){
 | 
						|
        if( strncmp(azDefine[j],&z[i],n)==0 && azDefine[j][n]==0 ){
 | 
						|
          res = 1;
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      i = k-1;
 | 
						|
      if( neg ){
 | 
						|
        res = !res;
 | 
						|
        neg = 0;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      okTerm = 0;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    goto pp_syntax_error;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return res;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
pp_syntax_error:
 | 
						|
  if( lineno>0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr, "%%if syntax error on line %d.\n", lineno);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr, "  %.*s <-- syntax error here\n", i+1, z);
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    return -(i+1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Run the preprocessor over the input file text.  The global variables
 | 
						|
** azDefine[0] through azDefine[nDefine-1] contains the names of all defined
 | 
						|
** macros.  This routine looks for "%ifdef" and "%ifndef" and "%endif" and
 | 
						|
** comments them out.  Text in between is also commented out as appropriate.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static void preprocess_input(char *z){
 | 
						|
  int i, j, k;
 | 
						|
  int exclude = 0;
 | 
						|
  int start = 0;
 | 
						|
  int lineno = 1;
 | 
						|
  int start_lineno = 1;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; z[i]; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( z[i]=='\n' ) lineno++;
 | 
						|
    if( z[i]!='%' || (i>0 && z[i-1]!='\n') ) continue;
 | 
						|
    if( strncmp(&z[i],"%endif",6)==0 && ISSPACE(z[i+6]) ){
 | 
						|
      if( exclude ){
 | 
						|
        exclude--;
 | 
						|
        if( exclude==0 ){
 | 
						|
          for(j=start; j<i; j++) if( z[j]!='\n' ) z[j] = ' ';
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      for(j=i; z[j] && z[j]!='\n'; j++) z[j] = ' ';
 | 
						|
    }else if( strncmp(&z[i],"%else",5)==0 && ISSPACE(z[i+5]) ){
 | 
						|
      if( exclude==1){
 | 
						|
        exclude = 0;
 | 
						|
        for(j=start; j<i; j++) if( z[j]!='\n' ) z[j] = ' ';
 | 
						|
      }else if( exclude==0 ){
 | 
						|
        exclude = 1;
 | 
						|
        start = i;
 | 
						|
        start_lineno = lineno;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      for(j=i; z[j] && z[j]!='\n'; j++) z[j] = ' ';
 | 
						|
    }else if( strncmp(&z[i],"%ifdef ",7)==0 
 | 
						|
          || strncmp(&z[i],"%if ",4)==0
 | 
						|
          || strncmp(&z[i],"%ifndef ",8)==0 ){
 | 
						|
      if( exclude ){
 | 
						|
        exclude++;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        int isNot;
 | 
						|
        int iBool;
 | 
						|
        for(j=i; z[j] && !ISSPACE(z[j]); j++){}
 | 
						|
        iBool = j;
 | 
						|
        isNot = (j==i+7);
 | 
						|
        while( z[j] && z[j]!='\n' ){ j++; }
 | 
						|
        k = z[j];
 | 
						|
        z[j] = 0;
 | 
						|
        exclude = eval_preprocessor_boolean(&z[iBool], lineno);
 | 
						|
        z[j] = k;
 | 
						|
        if( !isNot ) exclude = !exclude;
 | 
						|
        if( exclude ){
 | 
						|
          start = i;
 | 
						|
          start_lineno = lineno;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      for(j=i; z[j] && z[j]!='\n'; j++) z[j] = ' ';
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( exclude ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"unterminated %%ifdef starting on line %d\n", start_lineno);
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* In spite of its name, this function is really a scanner.  It read
 | 
						|
** in the entire input file (all at once) then tokenizes it.  Each
 | 
						|
** token is passed to the function "parseonetoken" which builds all
 | 
						|
** the appropriate data structures in the global state vector "gp".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void Parse(struct lemon *gp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct pstate ps;
 | 
						|
  FILE *fp;
 | 
						|
  char *filebuf;
 | 
						|
  unsigned int filesize;
 | 
						|
  int lineno;
 | 
						|
  int c;
 | 
						|
  char *cp, *nextcp;
 | 
						|
  int startline = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  memset(&ps, '\0', sizeof(ps));
 | 
						|
  ps.gp = gp;
 | 
						|
  ps.filename = gp->filename;
 | 
						|
  ps.errorcnt = 0;
 | 
						|
  ps.state = INITIALIZE;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Begin by reading the input file */
 | 
						|
  fp = fopen(ps.filename,"rb");
 | 
						|
  if( fp==0 ){
 | 
						|
    ErrorMsg(ps.filename,0,"Can't open this file for reading.");
 | 
						|
    gp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fseek(fp,0,2);
 | 
						|
  filesize = ftell(fp);
 | 
						|
  rewind(fp);
 | 
						|
  filebuf = (char *)malloc( filesize+1 );
 | 
						|
  if( filesize>100000000 || filebuf==0 ){
 | 
						|
    ErrorMsg(ps.filename,0,"Input file too large.");
 | 
						|
    free(filebuf);
 | 
						|
    gp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
    fclose(fp);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( fread(filebuf,1,filesize,fp)!=filesize ){
 | 
						|
    ErrorMsg(ps.filename,0,"Can't read in all %d bytes of this file.",
 | 
						|
      filesize);
 | 
						|
    free(filebuf);
 | 
						|
    gp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
    fclose(fp);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fclose(fp);
 | 
						|
  filebuf[filesize] = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Make an initial pass through the file to handle %ifdef and %ifndef */
 | 
						|
  preprocess_input(filebuf);
 | 
						|
  if( gp->printPreprocessed ){
 | 
						|
    printf("%s\n", filebuf);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Now scan the text of the input file */
 | 
						|
  lineno = 1;
 | 
						|
  for(cp=filebuf; (c= *cp)!=0; ){
 | 
						|
    if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;              /* Keep track of the line number */
 | 
						|
    if( ISSPACE(c) ){ cp++; continue; }  /* Skip all white space */
 | 
						|
    if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='/' ){          /* Skip C++ style comments */
 | 
						|
      cp+=2;
 | 
						|
      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && c!='\n' ) cp++;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='*' ){          /* Skip C style comments */
 | 
						|
      cp+=2;
 | 
						|
      if( (*cp)=='/' ) cp++;
 | 
						|
      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && (c!='/' || cp[-1]!='*') ){
 | 
						|
        if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
 | 
						|
        cp++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( c ) cp++;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    ps.tokenstart = cp;                /* Mark the beginning of the token */
 | 
						|
    ps.tokenlineno = lineno;           /* Linenumber on which token begins */
 | 
						|
    if( c=='\"' ){                     /* String literals */
 | 
						|
      cp++;
 | 
						|
      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && c!='\"' ){
 | 
						|
        if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
 | 
						|
        cp++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( c==0 ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(ps.filename,startline,
 | 
						|
            "String starting on this line is not terminated before "
 | 
						|
            "the end of the file.");
 | 
						|
        ps.errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        nextcp = cp;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        nextcp = cp+1;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }else if( c=='{' ){               /* A block of C code */
 | 
						|
      int level;
 | 
						|
      cp++;
 | 
						|
      for(level=1; (c= *cp)!=0 && (level>1 || c!='}'); cp++){
 | 
						|
        if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
 | 
						|
        else if( c=='{' ) level++;
 | 
						|
        else if( c=='}' ) level--;
 | 
						|
        else if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='*' ){  /* Skip comments */
 | 
						|
          int prevc;
 | 
						|
          cp = &cp[2];
 | 
						|
          prevc = 0;
 | 
						|
          while( (c= *cp)!=0 && (c!='/' || prevc!='*') ){
 | 
						|
            if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
 | 
						|
            prevc = c;
 | 
						|
            cp++;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }else if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='/' ){  /* Skip C++ style comments too */
 | 
						|
          cp = &cp[2];
 | 
						|
          while( (c= *cp)!=0 && c!='\n' ) cp++;
 | 
						|
          if( c ) lineno++;
 | 
						|
        }else if( c=='\'' || c=='\"' ){    /* String a character literals */
 | 
						|
          int startchar, prevc;
 | 
						|
          startchar = c;
 | 
						|
          prevc = 0;
 | 
						|
          for(cp++; (c= *cp)!=0 && (c!=startchar || prevc=='\\'); cp++){
 | 
						|
            if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
 | 
						|
            if( prevc=='\\' ) prevc = 0;
 | 
						|
            else              prevc = c;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( c==0 ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(ps.filename,ps.tokenlineno,
 | 
						|
          "C code starting on this line is not terminated before "
 | 
						|
          "the end of the file.");
 | 
						|
        ps.errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        nextcp = cp;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        nextcp = cp+1;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }else if( ISALNUM(c) ){          /* Identifiers */
 | 
						|
      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && (ISALNUM(c) || c=='_') ) cp++;
 | 
						|
      nextcp = cp;
 | 
						|
    }else if( c==':' && cp[1]==':' && cp[2]=='=' ){ /* The operator "::=" */
 | 
						|
      cp += 3;
 | 
						|
      nextcp = cp;
 | 
						|
    }else if( (c=='/' || c=='|') && ISALPHA(cp[1]) ){
 | 
						|
      cp += 2;
 | 
						|
      while( (c = *cp)!=0 && (ISALNUM(c) || c=='_') ) cp++;
 | 
						|
      nextcp = cp;
 | 
						|
    }else{                          /* All other (one character) operators */
 | 
						|
      cp++;
 | 
						|
      nextcp = cp;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    c = *cp;
 | 
						|
    *cp = 0;                        /* Null terminate the token */
 | 
						|
    parseonetoken(&ps);             /* Parse the token */
 | 
						|
    *cp = (char)c;                  /* Restore the buffer */
 | 
						|
    cp = nextcp;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  free(filebuf);                    /* Release the buffer after parsing */
 | 
						|
  gp->rule = ps.firstrule;
 | 
						|
  gp->errorcnt = ps.errorcnt;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/*************************** From the file "plink.c" *********************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Routines processing configuration follow-set propagation links
 | 
						|
** in the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static struct plink *plink_freelist = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new plink */
 | 
						|
struct plink *Plink_new(void){
 | 
						|
  struct plink *newlink;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( plink_freelist==0 ){
 | 
						|
    int i;
 | 
						|
    int amt = 100;
 | 
						|
    plink_freelist = (struct plink *)calloc( amt, sizeof(struct plink) );
 | 
						|
    if( plink_freelist==0 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(stderr,
 | 
						|
      "Unable to allocate memory for a new follow-set propagation link.\n");
 | 
						|
      exit(1);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<amt-1; i++) plink_freelist[i].next = &plink_freelist[i+1];
 | 
						|
    plink_freelist[amt-1].next = 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  newlink = plink_freelist;
 | 
						|
  plink_freelist = plink_freelist->next;
 | 
						|
  return newlink;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Add a plink to a plink list */
 | 
						|
void Plink_add(struct plink **plpp, struct config *cfp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct plink *newlink;
 | 
						|
  newlink = Plink_new();
 | 
						|
  newlink->next = *plpp;
 | 
						|
  *plpp = newlink;
 | 
						|
  newlink->cfp = cfp;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Transfer every plink on the list "from" to the list "to" */
 | 
						|
void Plink_copy(struct plink **to, struct plink *from)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct plink *nextpl;
 | 
						|
  while( from ){
 | 
						|
    nextpl = from->next;
 | 
						|
    from->next = *to;
 | 
						|
    *to = from;
 | 
						|
    from = nextpl;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Delete every plink on the list */
 | 
						|
void Plink_delete(struct plink *plp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct plink *nextpl;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  while( plp ){
 | 
						|
    nextpl = plp->next;
 | 
						|
    plp->next = plink_freelist;
 | 
						|
    plink_freelist = plp;
 | 
						|
    plp = nextpl;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/*********************** From the file "report.c" **************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Procedures for generating reports and tables in the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Generate a filename with the given suffix.  Space to hold the
 | 
						|
** name comes from malloc() and must be freed by the calling
 | 
						|
** function.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE char *file_makename(struct lemon *lemp, const char *suffix)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  char *name;
 | 
						|
  char *cp;
 | 
						|
  char *filename = lemp->filename;
 | 
						|
  int sz;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( outputDir ){
 | 
						|
    cp = strrchr(filename, '/');
 | 
						|
    if( cp ) filename = cp + 1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  sz = lemonStrlen(filename);
 | 
						|
  sz += lemonStrlen(suffix);
 | 
						|
  if( outputDir ) sz += lemonStrlen(outputDir) + 1;
 | 
						|
  sz += 5;
 | 
						|
  name = (char*)malloc( sz );
 | 
						|
  if( name==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Can't allocate space for a filename.\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  name[0] = 0;
 | 
						|
  if( outputDir ){
 | 
						|
    lemon_strcpy(name, outputDir);
 | 
						|
    lemon_strcat(name, "/");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lemon_strcat(name,filename);
 | 
						|
  cp = strrchr(name,'.');
 | 
						|
  if( cp ) *cp = 0;
 | 
						|
  lemon_strcat(name,suffix);
 | 
						|
  return name;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Open a file with a name based on the name of the input file,
 | 
						|
** but with a different (specified) suffix, and return a pointer
 | 
						|
** to the stream */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE FILE *file_open(
 | 
						|
  struct lemon *lemp,
 | 
						|
  const char *suffix,
 | 
						|
  const char *mode
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  FILE *fp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->outname ) free(lemp->outname);
 | 
						|
  lemp->outname = file_makename(lemp, suffix);
 | 
						|
  fp = fopen(lemp->outname,mode);
 | 
						|
  if( fp==0 && *mode=='w' ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Can't open file \"%s\".\n",lemp->outname);
 | 
						|
    lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
    return 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return fp;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print the text of a rule
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void rule_print(FILE *out, struct rule *rp){
 | 
						|
  int i, j;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "%s",rp->lhs->name);
 | 
						|
  /*    if( rp->lhsalias ) fprintf(out,"(%s)",rp->lhsalias); */
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out," ::=");
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
    if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out," %s", sp->subsym[0]->name);
 | 
						|
      for(j=1; j<sp->nsubsym; j++){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out,"|%s", sp->subsym[j]->name);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out," %s", sp->name);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    /* if( rp->rhsalias[i] ) fprintf(out,"(%s)",rp->rhsalias[i]); */
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Duplicate the input file without comments and without actions
 | 
						|
** on rules */
 | 
						|
void Reprint(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp;
 | 
						|
  int i, j, maxlen, len, ncolumns, skip;
 | 
						|
  printf("// Reprint of input file \"%s\".\n// Symbols:\n",lemp->filename);
 | 
						|
  maxlen = 10;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
    len = lemonStrlen(sp->name);
 | 
						|
    if( len>maxlen ) maxlen = len;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  ncolumns = 76/(maxlen+5);
 | 
						|
  if( ncolumns<1 ) ncolumns = 1;
 | 
						|
  skip = (lemp->nsymbol + ncolumns - 1)/ncolumns;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<skip; i++){
 | 
						|
    printf("//");
 | 
						|
    for(j=i; j<lemp->nsymbol; j+=skip){
 | 
						|
      sp = lemp->symbols[j];
 | 
						|
      assert( sp->index==j );
 | 
						|
      printf(" %3d %-*.*s",j,maxlen,maxlen,sp->name);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    printf("\n");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    rule_print(stdout, rp);
 | 
						|
    printf(".");
 | 
						|
    if( rp->precsym ) printf(" [%s]",rp->precsym->name);
 | 
						|
    /* if( rp->code ) printf("\n    %s",rp->code); */
 | 
						|
    printf("\n");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print a single rule.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void RulePrint(FILE *fp, struct rule *rp, int iCursor){
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp;
 | 
						|
  int i, j;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp,"%s ::=",rp->lhs->name);
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<=rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( i==iCursor ) fprintf(fp," *");
 | 
						|
    if( i==rp->nrhs ) break;
 | 
						|
    sp = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
    if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp," %s", sp->subsym[0]->name);
 | 
						|
      for(j=1; j<sp->nsubsym; j++){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(fp,"|%s",sp->subsym[j]->name);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp," %s", sp->name);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print the rule for a configuration.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void ConfigPrint(FILE *fp, struct config *cfp){
 | 
						|
  RulePrint(fp, cfp->rp, cfp->dot);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* #define TEST */
 | 
						|
#if 0
 | 
						|
/* Print a set */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void SetPrint(out,set,lemp)
 | 
						|
FILE *out;
 | 
						|
char *set;
 | 
						|
struct lemon *lemp;
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  char *spacer;
 | 
						|
  spacer = "";
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"%12s[","");
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nterminal; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( SetFind(set,i) ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out,"%s%s",spacer,lemp->symbols[i]->name);
 | 
						|
      spacer = " ";
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"]\n");
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print a plink chain */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void PlinkPrint(out,plp,tag)
 | 
						|
FILE *out;
 | 
						|
struct plink *plp;
 | 
						|
char *tag;
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  while( plp ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"%12s%s (state %2d) ","",tag,plp->cfp->stp->statenum);
 | 
						|
    ConfigPrint(out,plp->cfp);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"\n");
 | 
						|
    plp = plp->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print an action to the given file descriptor.  Return FALSE if
 | 
						|
** nothing was actually printed.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
int PrintAction(
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap,          /* The action to print */
 | 
						|
  FILE *fp,                   /* Print the action here */
 | 
						|
  int indent                  /* Indent by this amount */
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  int result = 1;
 | 
						|
  switch( ap->type ){
 | 
						|
    case SHIFT: {
 | 
						|
      struct state *stp = ap->x.stp;
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"%*s shift        %-7d",indent,ap->sp->name,stp->statenum);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case REDUCE: {
 | 
						|
      struct rule *rp = ap->x.rp;
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"%*s reduce       %-7d",indent,ap->sp->name,rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
      RulePrint(fp, rp, -1);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case SHIFTREDUCE: {
 | 
						|
      struct rule *rp = ap->x.rp;
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"%*s shift-reduce %-7d",indent,ap->sp->name,rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
      RulePrint(fp, rp, -1);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case ACCEPT:
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"%*s accept",indent,ap->sp->name);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case ERROR:
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"%*s error",indent,ap->sp->name);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case SRCONFLICT:
 | 
						|
    case RRCONFLICT:
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"%*s reduce       %-7d ** Parsing conflict **",
 | 
						|
        indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case SSCONFLICT:
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"%*s shift        %-7d ** Parsing conflict **",
 | 
						|
        indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.stp->statenum);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case SH_RESOLVED:
 | 
						|
      if( showPrecedenceConflict ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(fp,"%*s shift        %-7d -- dropped by precedence",
 | 
						|
                indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.stp->statenum);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        result = 0;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case RD_RESOLVED:
 | 
						|
      if( showPrecedenceConflict ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(fp,"%*s reduce %-7d -- dropped by precedence",
 | 
						|
                indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        result = 0;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case NOT_USED:
 | 
						|
      result = 0;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( result && ap->spOpt ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp,"  /* because %s==%s */", ap->sp->name, ap->spOpt->name);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return result;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Generate the "*.out" log file */
 | 
						|
void ReportOutput(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i, n;
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;
 | 
						|
  struct config *cfp;
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
  FILE *fp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  fp = file_open(lemp,".out","wb");
 | 
						|
  if( fp==0 ) return;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp,"State %d:\n",stp->statenum);
 | 
						|
    if( lemp->basisflag ) cfp=stp->bp;
 | 
						|
    else                  cfp=stp->cfp;
 | 
						|
    while( cfp ){
 | 
						|
      char buf[20];
 | 
						|
      if( cfp->dot==cfp->rp->nrhs ){
 | 
						|
        lemon_sprintf(buf,"(%d)",cfp->rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
        fprintf(fp,"    %5s ",buf);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        fprintf(fp,"          ");
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      ConfigPrint(fp,cfp);
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"\n");
 | 
						|
#if 0
 | 
						|
      SetPrint(fp,cfp->fws,lemp);
 | 
						|
      PlinkPrint(fp,cfp->fplp,"To  ");
 | 
						|
      PlinkPrint(fp,cfp->bplp,"From");
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
      if( lemp->basisflag ) cfp=cfp->bp;
 | 
						|
      else                  cfp=cfp->next;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp,"\n");
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      if( PrintAction(ap,fp,30) ) fprintf(fp,"\n");
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp,"\n");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "----------------------------------------------------\n");
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "Symbols:\n");
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "The first-set of non-terminals is shown after the name.\n\n");
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    int j;
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *sp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp, "  %3d: %s", i, sp->name);
 | 
						|
    if( sp->type==NONTERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp, ":");
 | 
						|
      if( sp->lambda ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(fp, " <lambda>");
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      for(j=0; j<lemp->nterminal; j++){
 | 
						|
        if( sp->firstset && SetFind(sp->firstset, j) ){
 | 
						|
          fprintf(fp, " %s", lemp->symbols[j]->name);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( sp->prec>=0 ) fprintf(fp," (precedence=%d)", sp->prec);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp, "\n");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "----------------------------------------------------\n");
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "Syntax-only Symbols:\n");
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "The following symbols never carry semantic content.\n\n");
 | 
						|
  for(i=n=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    int w;
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
    if( sp->bContent ) continue;
 | 
						|
    w = (int)strlen(sp->name);
 | 
						|
    if( n>0 && n+w>75 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp,"\n");
 | 
						|
      n = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( n>0 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp, " ");
 | 
						|
      n++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp, "%s", sp->name);
 | 
						|
    n += w;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( n>0 ) fprintf(fp, "\n");
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "----------------------------------------------------\n");
 | 
						|
  fprintf(fp, "Rules:\n");
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp, "%4d: ", rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
    rule_print(fp, rp);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp,".");
 | 
						|
    if( rp->precsym ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(fp," [%s precedence=%d]",
 | 
						|
              rp->precsym->name, rp->precsym->prec);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(fp,"\n");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fclose(fp);
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Search for the file "name" which is in the same directory as
 | 
						|
** the executable */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE char *pathsearch(char *argv0, char *name, int modemask)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  const char *pathlist;
 | 
						|
  char *pathbufptr = 0;
 | 
						|
  char *pathbuf = 0;
 | 
						|
  char *path,*cp;
 | 
						|
  char c;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#ifdef __WIN32__
 | 
						|
  cp = strrchr(argv0,'\\');
 | 
						|
#else
 | 
						|
  cp = strrchr(argv0,'/');
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
  if( cp ){
 | 
						|
    c = *cp;
 | 
						|
    *cp = 0;
 | 
						|
    path = (char *)malloc( lemonStrlen(argv0) + lemonStrlen(name) + 2 );
 | 
						|
    if( path ) lemon_sprintf(path,"%s/%s",argv0,name);
 | 
						|
    *cp = c;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    pathlist = getenv("PATH");
 | 
						|
    if( pathlist==0 ) pathlist = ".:/bin:/usr/bin";
 | 
						|
    pathbuf = (char *) malloc( lemonStrlen(pathlist) + 1 );
 | 
						|
    path = (char *)malloc( lemonStrlen(pathlist)+lemonStrlen(name)+2 );
 | 
						|
    if( (pathbuf != 0) && (path!=0) ){
 | 
						|
      pathbufptr = pathbuf;
 | 
						|
      lemon_strcpy(pathbuf, pathlist);
 | 
						|
      while( *pathbuf ){
 | 
						|
        cp = strchr(pathbuf,':');
 | 
						|
        if( cp==0 ) cp = &pathbuf[lemonStrlen(pathbuf)];
 | 
						|
        c = *cp;
 | 
						|
        *cp = 0;
 | 
						|
        lemon_sprintf(path,"%s/%s",pathbuf,name);
 | 
						|
        *cp = c;
 | 
						|
        if( c==0 ) pathbuf[0] = 0;
 | 
						|
        else pathbuf = &cp[1];
 | 
						|
        if( access(path,modemask)==0 ) break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    free(pathbufptr);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return path;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Given an action, compute the integer value for that action
 | 
						|
** which is to be put in the action table of the generated machine.
 | 
						|
** Return negative if no action should be generated.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE int compute_action(struct lemon *lemp, struct action *ap)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int act;
 | 
						|
  switch( ap->type ){
 | 
						|
    case SHIFT:  act = ap->x.stp->statenum;                        break;
 | 
						|
    case SHIFTREDUCE: {
 | 
						|
      /* Since a SHIFT is inherient after a prior REDUCE, convert any
 | 
						|
      ** SHIFTREDUCE action with a nonterminal on the LHS into a simple
 | 
						|
      ** REDUCE action: */
 | 
						|
      if( ap->sp->index>=lemp->nterminal
 | 
						|
       && (lemp->errsym==0 || ap->sp->index!=lemp->errsym->index)
 | 
						|
      ){
 | 
						|
        act = lemp->minReduce + ap->x.rp->iRule;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        act = lemp->minShiftReduce + ap->x.rp->iRule;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case REDUCE: act = lemp->minReduce + ap->x.rp->iRule;          break;
 | 
						|
    case ERROR:  act = lemp->errAction;                            break;
 | 
						|
    case ACCEPT: act = lemp->accAction;                            break;
 | 
						|
    default:     act = -1; break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return act;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#define LINESIZE 1000
 | 
						|
/* The next cluster of routines are for reading the template file
 | 
						|
** and writing the results to the generated parser */
 | 
						|
/* The first function transfers data from "in" to "out" until
 | 
						|
** a line is seen which begins with "%%".  The line number is
 | 
						|
** tracked.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** if name!=0, then any word that begin with "Parse" is changed to
 | 
						|
** begin with *name instead.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void tplt_xfer(char *name, FILE *in, FILE *out, int *lineno)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i, iStart;
 | 
						|
  char line[LINESIZE];
 | 
						|
  while( fgets(line,LINESIZE,in) && (line[0]!='%' || line[1]!='%') ){
 | 
						|
    (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
    iStart = 0;
 | 
						|
    if( name ){
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; line[i]; i++){
 | 
						|
        if( line[i]=='P' && strncmp(&line[i],"Parse",5)==0
 | 
						|
          && (i==0 || !ISALPHA(line[i-1]))
 | 
						|
        ){
 | 
						|
          if( i>iStart ) fprintf(out,"%.*s",i-iStart,&line[iStart]);
 | 
						|
          fprintf(out,"%s",name);
 | 
						|
          i += 4;
 | 
						|
          iStart = i+1;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"%s",&line[iStart]);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Skip forward past the header of the template file to the first "%%"
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void tplt_skip_header(FILE *in, int *lineno)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  char line[LINESIZE];
 | 
						|
  while( fgets(line,LINESIZE,in) && (line[0]!='%' || line[1]!='%') ){
 | 
						|
    (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* The next function finds the template file and opens it, returning
 | 
						|
** a pointer to the opened file. */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE FILE *tplt_open(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  static char templatename[] = "lempar.c";
 | 
						|
  char buf[1000];
 | 
						|
  FILE *in;
 | 
						|
  char *tpltname;
 | 
						|
  char *toFree = 0;
 | 
						|
  char *cp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* first, see if user specified a template filename on the command line. */
 | 
						|
  if (user_templatename != 0) {
 | 
						|
    if( access(user_templatename,004)==-1 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(stderr,"Can't find the parser driver template file \"%s\".\n",
 | 
						|
        user_templatename);
 | 
						|
      lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      return 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    in = fopen(user_templatename,"rb");
 | 
						|
    if( in==0 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(stderr,"Can't open the template file \"%s\".\n",
 | 
						|
              user_templatename);
 | 
						|
      lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      return 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return in;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  cp = strrchr(lemp->filename,'.');
 | 
						|
  if( cp ){
 | 
						|
    lemon_sprintf(buf,"%.*s.lt",(int)(cp-lemp->filename),lemp->filename);
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    lemon_sprintf(buf,"%s.lt",lemp->filename);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( access(buf,004)==0 ){
 | 
						|
    tpltname = buf;
 | 
						|
  }else if( access(templatename,004)==0 ){
 | 
						|
    tpltname = templatename;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    toFree = tpltname = pathsearch(lemp->argv0,templatename,0);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( tpltname==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Can't find the parser driver template file \"%s\".\n",
 | 
						|
    templatename);
 | 
						|
    lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
    return 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  in = fopen(tpltname,"rb");
 | 
						|
  if( in==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Can't open the template file \"%s\".\n",tpltname);
 | 
						|
    lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  free(toFree);
 | 
						|
  return in;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print a #line directive line to the output file. */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void tplt_linedir(FILE *out, int lineno, char *filename)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#line %d \"",lineno);
 | 
						|
  while( *filename ){
 | 
						|
    if( *filename == '\\' ) putc('\\',out);
 | 
						|
    putc(*filename,out);
 | 
						|
    filename++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"\"\n");
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Print a string to the file and keep the linenumber up to date */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void tplt_print(FILE *out, struct lemon *lemp, char *str, int *lineno)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  if( str==0 ) return;
 | 
						|
  while( *str ){
 | 
						|
    putc(*str,out);
 | 
						|
    if( *str=='\n' ) (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
    str++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( str[-1]!='\n' ){
 | 
						|
    putc('\n',out);
 | 
						|
    (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (!lemp->nolinenosflag) {
 | 
						|
    (*lineno)++; tplt_linedir(out,*lineno,lemp->outname);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** The following routine emits code for the destructor for the
 | 
						|
** symbol sp
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void emit_destructor_code(
 | 
						|
  FILE *out,
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp,
 | 
						|
  struct lemon *lemp,
 | 
						|
  int *lineno
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
 char *cp = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 if( sp->type==TERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
   cp = lemp->tokendest;
 | 
						|
   if( cp==0 ) return;
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out,"{\n"); (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
 }else if( sp->destructor ){
 | 
						|
   cp = sp->destructor;
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out,"{\n"); (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
   if( !lemp->nolinenosflag ){
 | 
						|
     (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
     tplt_linedir(out,sp->destLineno,lemp->filename);
 | 
						|
   }
 | 
						|
 }else if( lemp->vardest ){
 | 
						|
   cp = lemp->vardest;
 | 
						|
   if( cp==0 ) return;
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out,"{\n"); (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
 }else{
 | 
						|
   assert( 0 );  /* Cannot happen */
 | 
						|
 }
 | 
						|
 for(; *cp; cp++){
 | 
						|
   if( *cp=='$' && cp[1]=='$' ){
 | 
						|
     fprintf(out,"(yypminor->yy%d)",sp->dtnum);
 | 
						|
     cp++;
 | 
						|
     continue;
 | 
						|
   }
 | 
						|
   if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
   fputc(*cp,out);
 | 
						|
 }
 | 
						|
 fprintf(out,"\n"); (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
 if (!lemp->nolinenosflag) {
 | 
						|
   (*lineno)++; tplt_linedir(out,*lineno,lemp->outname);
 | 
						|
 }
 | 
						|
 fprintf(out,"}\n"); (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
 return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Return TRUE (non-zero) if the given symbol has a destructor.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
int has_destructor(struct symbol *sp, struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int ret;
 | 
						|
  if( sp->type==TERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
    ret = lemp->tokendest!=0;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    ret = lemp->vardest!=0 || sp->destructor!=0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return ret;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Append text to a dynamically allocated string.  If zText is 0 then
 | 
						|
** reset the string to be empty again.  Always return the complete text
 | 
						|
** of the string (which is overwritten with each call).
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** n bytes of zText are stored.  If n==0 then all of zText up to the first
 | 
						|
** \000 terminator is stored.  zText can contain up to two instances of
 | 
						|
** %d.  The values of p1 and p2 are written into the first and second
 | 
						|
** %d.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** If n==-1, then the previous character is overwritten.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE char *append_str(const char *zText, int n, int p1, int p2){
 | 
						|
  static char empty[1] = { 0 };
 | 
						|
  static char *z = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int alloced = 0;
 | 
						|
  static int used = 0;
 | 
						|
  int c;
 | 
						|
  char zInt[40];
 | 
						|
  if( zText==0 ){
 | 
						|
    if( used==0 && z!=0 ) z[0] = 0;
 | 
						|
    used = 0;
 | 
						|
    return z;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( n<=0 ){
 | 
						|
    if( n<0 ){
 | 
						|
      used += n;
 | 
						|
      assert( used>=0 );
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    n = lemonStrlen(zText);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( (int) (n+sizeof(zInt)*2+used) >= alloced ){
 | 
						|
    alloced = n + sizeof(zInt)*2 + used + 200;
 | 
						|
    z = (char *) realloc(z,  alloced);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( z==0 ) return empty;
 | 
						|
  while( n-- > 0 ){
 | 
						|
    c = *(zText++);
 | 
						|
    if( c=='%' && n>0 && zText[0]=='d' ){
 | 
						|
      lemon_sprintf(zInt, "%d", p1);
 | 
						|
      p1 = p2;
 | 
						|
      lemon_strcpy(&z[used], zInt);
 | 
						|
      used += lemonStrlen(&z[used]);
 | 
						|
      zText++;
 | 
						|
      n--;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      z[used++] = (char)c;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  z[used] = 0;
 | 
						|
  return z;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Write and transform the rp->code string so that symbols are expanded.
 | 
						|
** Populate the rp->codePrefix and rp->codeSuffix strings, as appropriate.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Return 1 if the expanded code requires that "yylhsminor" local variable
 | 
						|
** to be defined.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE int translate_code(struct lemon *lemp, struct rule *rp){
 | 
						|
  char *cp, *xp;
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  int rc = 0;            /* True if yylhsminor is used */
 | 
						|
  int dontUseRhs0 = 0;   /* If true, use of left-most RHS label is illegal */
 | 
						|
  const char *zSkip = 0; /* The zOvwrt comment within rp->code, or NULL */
 | 
						|
  char lhsused = 0;      /* True if the LHS element has been used */
 | 
						|
  char lhsdirect;        /* True if LHS writes directly into stack */
 | 
						|
  char used[MAXRHS];     /* True for each RHS element which is used */
 | 
						|
  char zLhs[50];         /* Convert the LHS symbol into this string */
 | 
						|
  char zOvwrt[900];      /* Comment that to allow LHS to overwrite RHS */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++) used[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
  lhsused = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( rp->code==0 ){
 | 
						|
    static char newlinestr[2] = { '\n', '\0' };
 | 
						|
    rp->code = newlinestr;
 | 
						|
    rp->line = rp->ruleline;
 | 
						|
    rp->noCode = 1;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    rp->noCode = 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( rp->nrhs==0 ){
 | 
						|
    /* If there are no RHS symbols, then writing directly to the LHS is ok */
 | 
						|
    lhsdirect = 1;
 | 
						|
  }else if( rp->rhsalias[0]==0 ){
 | 
						|
    /* The left-most RHS symbol has no value.  LHS direct is ok.  But
 | 
						|
    ** we have to call the destructor on the RHS symbol first. */
 | 
						|
    lhsdirect = 1;
 | 
						|
    if( has_destructor(rp->rhs[0],lemp) ){
 | 
						|
      append_str(0,0,0,0);
 | 
						|
      append_str("  yy_destructor(yypParser,%d,&yymsp[%d].minor);\n", 0,
 | 
						|
                 rp->rhs[0]->index,1-rp->nrhs);
 | 
						|
      rp->codePrefix = Strsafe(append_str(0,0,0,0));
 | 
						|
      rp->noCode = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }else if( rp->lhsalias==0 ){
 | 
						|
    /* There is no LHS value symbol. */
 | 
						|
    lhsdirect = 1;
 | 
						|
  }else if( strcmp(rp->lhsalias,rp->rhsalias[0])==0 ){
 | 
						|
    /* The LHS symbol and the left-most RHS symbol are the same, so
 | 
						|
    ** direct writing is allowed */
 | 
						|
    lhsdirect = 1;
 | 
						|
    lhsused = 1;
 | 
						|
    used[0] = 1;
 | 
						|
    if( rp->lhs->dtnum!=rp->rhs[0]->dtnum ){
 | 
						|
      ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
 | 
						|
        "%s(%s) and %s(%s) share the same label but have "
 | 
						|
        "different datatypes.",
 | 
						|
        rp->lhs->name, rp->lhsalias, rp->rhs[0]->name, rp->rhsalias[0]);
 | 
						|
      lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    lemon_sprintf(zOvwrt, "/*%s-overwrites-%s*/",
 | 
						|
                  rp->lhsalias, rp->rhsalias[0]);
 | 
						|
    zSkip = strstr(rp->code, zOvwrt);
 | 
						|
    if( zSkip!=0 ){
 | 
						|
      /* The code contains a special comment that indicates that it is safe
 | 
						|
      ** for the LHS label to overwrite left-most RHS label. */
 | 
						|
      lhsdirect = 1;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      lhsdirect = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lhsdirect ){
 | 
						|
    sprintf(zLhs, "yymsp[%d].minor.yy%d",1-rp->nrhs,rp->lhs->dtnum);
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    rc = 1;
 | 
						|
    sprintf(zLhs, "yylhsminor.yy%d",rp->lhs->dtnum);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  append_str(0,0,0,0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* This const cast is wrong but harmless, if we're careful. */
 | 
						|
  for(cp=(char *)rp->code; *cp; cp++){
 | 
						|
    if( cp==zSkip ){
 | 
						|
      append_str(zOvwrt,0,0,0);
 | 
						|
      cp += lemonStrlen(zOvwrt)-1;
 | 
						|
      dontUseRhs0 = 1;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( ISALPHA(*cp) && (cp==rp->code || (!ISALNUM(cp[-1]) && cp[-1]!='_')) ){
 | 
						|
      char saved;
 | 
						|
      for(xp= &cp[1]; ISALNUM(*xp) || *xp=='_'; xp++);
 | 
						|
      saved = *xp;
 | 
						|
      *xp = 0;
 | 
						|
      if( rp->lhsalias && strcmp(cp,rp->lhsalias)==0 ){
 | 
						|
        append_str(zLhs,0,0,0);
 | 
						|
        cp = xp;
 | 
						|
        lhsused = 1;
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
          if( rp->rhsalias[i] && strcmp(cp,rp->rhsalias[i])==0 ){
 | 
						|
            if( i==0 && dontUseRhs0 ){
 | 
						|
              ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
 | 
						|
                 "Label %s used after '%s'.",
 | 
						|
                 rp->rhsalias[0], zOvwrt);
 | 
						|
              lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
            }else if( cp!=rp->code && cp[-1]=='@' ){
 | 
						|
              /* If the argument is of the form @X then substituted
 | 
						|
              ** the token number of X, not the value of X */
 | 
						|
              append_str("yymsp[%d].major",-1,i-rp->nrhs+1,0);
 | 
						|
            }else{
 | 
						|
              struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[i];
 | 
						|
              int dtnum;
 | 
						|
              if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
                dtnum = sp->subsym[0]->dtnum;
 | 
						|
              }else{
 | 
						|
                dtnum = sp->dtnum;
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
              append_str("yymsp[%d].minor.yy%d",0,i-rp->nrhs+1, dtnum);
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
            cp = xp;
 | 
						|
            used[i] = 1;
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      *xp = saved;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    append_str(cp, 1, 0, 0);
 | 
						|
  } /* End loop */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Main code generation completed */
 | 
						|
  cp = append_str(0,0,0,0);
 | 
						|
  if( cp && cp[0] ) rp->code = Strsafe(cp);
 | 
						|
  append_str(0,0,0,0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Check to make sure the LHS has been used */
 | 
						|
  if( rp->lhsalias && !lhsused ){
 | 
						|
    ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
 | 
						|
      "Label \"%s\" for \"%s(%s)\" is never used.",
 | 
						|
        rp->lhsalias,rp->lhs->name,rp->lhsalias);
 | 
						|
    lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate destructor code for RHS minor values which are not referenced.
 | 
						|
  ** Generate error messages for unused labels and duplicate labels.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( rp->rhsalias[i] ){
 | 
						|
      if( i>0 ){
 | 
						|
        int j;
 | 
						|
        if( rp->lhsalias && strcmp(rp->lhsalias,rp->rhsalias[i])==0 ){
 | 
						|
          ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
 | 
						|
            "%s(%s) has the same label as the LHS but is not the left-most "
 | 
						|
            "symbol on the RHS.",
 | 
						|
            rp->rhs[i]->name, rp->rhsalias[i]);
 | 
						|
          lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        for(j=0; j<i; j++){
 | 
						|
          if( rp->rhsalias[j] && strcmp(rp->rhsalias[j],rp->rhsalias[i])==0 ){
 | 
						|
            ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
 | 
						|
              "Label %s used for multiple symbols on the RHS of a rule.",
 | 
						|
              rp->rhsalias[i]);
 | 
						|
            lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( !used[i] ){
 | 
						|
        ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
 | 
						|
          "Label %s for \"%s(%s)\" is never used.",
 | 
						|
          rp->rhsalias[i],rp->rhs[i]->name,rp->rhsalias[i]);
 | 
						|
        lemp->errorcnt++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }else if( i>0 && has_destructor(rp->rhs[i],lemp) ){
 | 
						|
      append_str("  yy_destructor(yypParser,%d,&yymsp[%d].minor);\n", 0,
 | 
						|
         rp->rhs[i]->index,i-rp->nrhs+1);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* If unable to write LHS values directly into the stack, write the
 | 
						|
  ** saved LHS value now. */
 | 
						|
  if( lhsdirect==0 ){
 | 
						|
    append_str("  yymsp[%d].minor.yy%d = ", 0, 1-rp->nrhs, rp->lhs->dtnum);
 | 
						|
    append_str(zLhs, 0, 0, 0);
 | 
						|
    append_str(";\n", 0, 0, 0);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Suffix code generation complete */
 | 
						|
  cp = append_str(0,0,0,0);
 | 
						|
  if( cp && cp[0] ){
 | 
						|
    rp->codeSuffix = Strsafe(cp);
 | 
						|
    rp->noCode = 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return rc;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Generate code which executes when the rule "rp" is reduced.  Write
 | 
						|
** the code to "out".  Make sure lineno stays up-to-date.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
PRIVATE void emit_code(
 | 
						|
  FILE *out,
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp,
 | 
						|
  struct lemon *lemp,
 | 
						|
  int *lineno
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
 const char *cp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 /* Setup code prior to the #line directive */
 | 
						|
 if( rp->codePrefix && rp->codePrefix[0] ){
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out, "{%s", rp->codePrefix);
 | 
						|
   for(cp=rp->codePrefix; *cp; cp++){ if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++; }
 | 
						|
 }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 /* Generate code to do the reduce action */
 | 
						|
 if( rp->code ){
 | 
						|
   if( !lemp->nolinenosflag ){
 | 
						|
     (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
     tplt_linedir(out,rp->line,lemp->filename);
 | 
						|
   }
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out,"{%s",rp->code);
 | 
						|
   for(cp=rp->code; *cp; cp++){ if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++; }
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out,"}\n"); (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
   if( !lemp->nolinenosflag ){
 | 
						|
     (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
     tplt_linedir(out,*lineno,lemp->outname);
 | 
						|
   }
 | 
						|
 }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 /* Generate breakdown code that occurs after the #line directive */
 | 
						|
 if( rp->codeSuffix && rp->codeSuffix[0] ){
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out, "%s", rp->codeSuffix);
 | 
						|
   for(cp=rp->codeSuffix; *cp; cp++){ if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++; }
 | 
						|
 }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 if( rp->codePrefix ){
 | 
						|
   fprintf(out, "}\n"); (*lineno)++;
 | 
						|
 }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Print the definition of the union used for the parser's data stack.
 | 
						|
** This union contains fields for every possible data type for tokens
 | 
						|
** and nonterminals.  In the process of computing and printing this
 | 
						|
** union, also set the ".dtnum" field of every terminal and nonterminal
 | 
						|
** symbol.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void print_stack_union(
 | 
						|
  FILE *out,                  /* The output stream */
 | 
						|
  struct lemon *lemp,         /* The main info structure for this parser */
 | 
						|
  int *plineno,               /* Pointer to the line number */
 | 
						|
  int mhflag                  /* True if generating makeheaders output */
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  int lineno;               /* The line number of the output */
 | 
						|
  char **types;             /* A hash table of datatypes */
 | 
						|
  int arraysize;            /* Size of the "types" array */
 | 
						|
  int maxdtlength;          /* Maximum length of any ".datatype" field. */
 | 
						|
  char *stddt;              /* Standardized name for a datatype */
 | 
						|
  int i,j;                  /* Loop counters */
 | 
						|
  unsigned hash;            /* For hashing the name of a type */
 | 
						|
  const char *name;         /* Name of the parser */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Allocate and initialize types[] and allocate stddt[] */
 | 
						|
  arraysize = lemp->nsymbol * 2;
 | 
						|
  types = (char**)calloc( arraysize, sizeof(char*) );
 | 
						|
  if( types==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<arraysize; i++) types[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
  maxdtlength = 0;
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->vartype ){
 | 
						|
    maxdtlength = lemonStrlen(lemp->vartype);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    int len;
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
    if( sp->datatype==0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
    len = lemonStrlen(sp->datatype);
 | 
						|
    if( len>maxdtlength ) maxdtlength = len;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  stddt = (char*)malloc( maxdtlength*2 + 1 );
 | 
						|
  if( stddt==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Build a hash table of datatypes. The ".dtnum" field of each symbol
 | 
						|
  ** is filled in with the hash index plus 1.  A ".dtnum" value of 0 is
 | 
						|
  ** used for terminal symbols.  If there is no %default_type defined then
 | 
						|
  ** 0 is also used as the .dtnum value for nonterminals which do not specify
 | 
						|
  ** a datatype using the %type directive.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
    char *cp;
 | 
						|
    if( sp==lemp->errsym ){
 | 
						|
      sp->dtnum = arraysize+1;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( sp->type!=NONTERMINAL || (sp->datatype==0 && lemp->vartype==0) ){
 | 
						|
      sp->dtnum = 0;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    cp = sp->datatype;
 | 
						|
    if( cp==0 ) cp = lemp->vartype;
 | 
						|
    j = 0;
 | 
						|
    while( ISSPACE(*cp) ) cp++;
 | 
						|
    while( *cp ) stddt[j++] = *cp++;
 | 
						|
    while( j>0 && ISSPACE(stddt[j-1]) ) j--;
 | 
						|
    stddt[j] = 0;
 | 
						|
    if( lemp->tokentype && strcmp(stddt, lemp->tokentype)==0 ){
 | 
						|
      sp->dtnum = 0;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    hash = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(j=0; stddt[j]; j++){
 | 
						|
      hash = hash*53 + stddt[j];
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    hash = (hash & 0x7fffffff)%arraysize;
 | 
						|
    while( types[hash] ){
 | 
						|
      if( strcmp(types[hash],stddt)==0 ){
 | 
						|
        sp->dtnum = hash + 1;
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      hash++;
 | 
						|
      if( hash>=(unsigned)arraysize ) hash = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( types[hash]==0 ){
 | 
						|
      sp->dtnum = hash + 1;
 | 
						|
      types[hash] = (char*)malloc( lemonStrlen(stddt)+1 );
 | 
						|
      if( types[hash]==0 ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.\n");
 | 
						|
        exit(1);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      lemon_strcpy(types[hash],stddt);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Print out the definition of YYTOKENTYPE and YYMINORTYPE */
 | 
						|
  name = lemp->name ? lemp->name : "Parse";
 | 
						|
  lineno = *plineno;
 | 
						|
  if( mhflag ){ fprintf(out,"#if INTERFACE\n"); lineno++; }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define %sTOKENTYPE %s\n",name,
 | 
						|
    lemp->tokentype?lemp->tokentype:"void*");  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  if( mhflag ){ fprintf(out,"#endif\n"); lineno++; }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"typedef union {\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"  int yyinit;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"  %sTOKENTYPE yy0;\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<arraysize; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( types[i]==0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"  %s yy%d;\n",types[i],i+1); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    free(types[i]);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->errsym && lemp->errsym->useCnt ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"  int yy%d;\n",lemp->errsym->dtnum); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  free(stddt);
 | 
						|
  free(types);
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"} YYMINORTYPE;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  *plineno = lineno;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Return the name of a C datatype able to represent values between
 | 
						|
** lwr and upr, inclusive.  If pnByte!=NULL then also write the sizeof
 | 
						|
** for that type (1, 2, or 4) into *pnByte.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static const char *minimum_size_type(int lwr, int upr, int *pnByte){
 | 
						|
  const char *zType = "int";
 | 
						|
  int nByte = 4;
 | 
						|
  if( lwr>=0 ){
 | 
						|
    if( upr<=255 ){
 | 
						|
      zType = "unsigned char";
 | 
						|
      nByte = 1;
 | 
						|
    }else if( upr<65535 ){
 | 
						|
      zType = "unsigned short int";
 | 
						|
      nByte = 2;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      zType = "unsigned int";
 | 
						|
      nByte = 4;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }else if( lwr>=-127 && upr<=127 ){
 | 
						|
    zType = "signed char";
 | 
						|
    nByte = 1;
 | 
						|
  }else if( lwr>=-32767 && upr<32767 ){
 | 
						|
    zType = "short";
 | 
						|
    nByte = 2;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( pnByte ) *pnByte = nByte;
 | 
						|
  return zType;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Each state contains a set of token transaction and a set of
 | 
						|
** nonterminal transactions.  Each of these sets makes an instance
 | 
						|
** of the following structure.  An array of these structures is used
 | 
						|
** to order the creation of entries in the yy_action[] table.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
struct axset {
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;   /* A pointer to a state */
 | 
						|
  int isTkn;           /* True to use tokens.  False for non-terminals */
 | 
						|
  int nAction;         /* Number of actions */
 | 
						|
  int iOrder;          /* Original order of action sets */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Compare to axset structures for sorting purposes
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int axset_compare(const void *a, const void *b){
 | 
						|
  struct axset *p1 = (struct axset*)a;
 | 
						|
  struct axset *p2 = (struct axset*)b;
 | 
						|
  int c;
 | 
						|
  c = p2->nAction - p1->nAction;
 | 
						|
  if( c==0 ){
 | 
						|
    c = p1->iOrder - p2->iOrder;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  assert( c!=0 || p1==p2 );
 | 
						|
  return c;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Write text on "out" that describes the rule "rp".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static void writeRuleText(FILE *out, struct rule *rp){
 | 
						|
  int j;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"%s ::=", rp->lhs->name);
 | 
						|
  for(j=0; j<rp->nrhs; j++){
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[j];
 | 
						|
    if( sp->type!=MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out," %s", sp->name);
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      int k;
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out," %s", sp->subsym[0]->name);
 | 
						|
      for(k=1; k<sp->nsubsym; k++){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out,"|%s",sp->subsym[k]->name);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Generate C source code for the parser */
 | 
						|
void ReportTable(
 | 
						|
  struct lemon *lemp,
 | 
						|
  int mhflag,     /* Output in makeheaders format if true */
 | 
						|
  int sqlFlag     /* Generate the *.sql file too */
 | 
						|
){
 | 
						|
  FILE *out, *in, *sql;
 | 
						|
  int  lineno;
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp;
 | 
						|
  struct acttab *pActtab;
 | 
						|
  int i, j, n, sz;
 | 
						|
  int nLookAhead;
 | 
						|
  int szActionType;     /* sizeof(YYACTIONTYPE) */
 | 
						|
  int szCodeType;       /* sizeof(YYCODETYPE)   */
 | 
						|
  const char *name;
 | 
						|
  int mnTknOfst, mxTknOfst;
 | 
						|
  int mnNtOfst, mxNtOfst;
 | 
						|
  struct axset *ax;
 | 
						|
  char *prefix;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  lemp->minShiftReduce = lemp->nstate;
 | 
						|
  lemp->errAction = lemp->minShiftReduce + lemp->nrule;
 | 
						|
  lemp->accAction = lemp->errAction + 1;
 | 
						|
  lemp->noAction = lemp->accAction + 1;
 | 
						|
  lemp->minReduce = lemp->noAction + 1;
 | 
						|
  lemp->maxAction = lemp->minReduce + lemp->nrule;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  in = tplt_open(lemp);
 | 
						|
  if( in==0 ) return;
 | 
						|
  out = file_open(lemp,".c","wb");
 | 
						|
  if( out==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fclose(in);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( sqlFlag==0 ){
 | 
						|
    sql = 0;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    sql = file_open(lemp, ".sql", "wb");
 | 
						|
    if( sql==0 ){
 | 
						|
      fclose(in);
 | 
						|
      fclose(out);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(sql,
 | 
						|
       "BEGIN;\n"
 | 
						|
       "CREATE TABLE symbol(\n"
 | 
						|
       "  id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY,\n"
 | 
						|
       "  name TEXT NOT NULL,\n"
 | 
						|
       "  isTerminal BOOLEAN NOT NULL,\n"
 | 
						|
       "  fallback INTEGER REFERENCES symbol"
 | 
						|
               " DEFERRABLE INITIALLY DEFERRED\n"
 | 
						|
       ");\n"
 | 
						|
    );
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(sql,
 | 
						|
         "INSERT INTO symbol(id,name,isTerminal,fallback)"
 | 
						|
         "VALUES(%d,'%s',%s",
 | 
						|
         i, lemp->symbols[i]->name,
 | 
						|
         i<lemp->nterminal ? "TRUE" : "FALSE"
 | 
						|
      );
 | 
						|
      if( lemp->symbols[i]->fallback ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(sql, ",%d);\n", lemp->symbols[i]->fallback->index);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        fprintf(sql, ",NULL);\n");
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(sql,
 | 
						|
      "CREATE TABLE rule(\n"
 | 
						|
      "  ruleid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY,\n"
 | 
						|
      "  lhs INTEGER REFERENCES symbol(id),\n"
 | 
						|
      "  txt TEXT\n"
 | 
						|
      ");\n"
 | 
						|
      "CREATE TABLE rulerhs(\n"
 | 
						|
      "  ruleid INTEGER REFERENCES rule(ruleid),\n"
 | 
						|
      "  pos INTEGER,\n"
 | 
						|
      "  sym INTEGER REFERENCES symbol(id)\n"
 | 
						|
      ");\n"
 | 
						|
    );
 | 
						|
    for(i=0, rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next, i++){
 | 
						|
      assert( i==rp->iRule );
 | 
						|
      fprintf(sql,
 | 
						|
        "INSERT INTO rule(ruleid,lhs,txt)VALUES(%d,%d,'",
 | 
						|
        rp->iRule, rp->lhs->index
 | 
						|
      );
 | 
						|
      writeRuleText(sql, rp);
 | 
						|
      fprintf(sql,"');\n");
 | 
						|
      for(j=0; j<rp->nrhs; j++){
 | 
						|
        struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[j];
 | 
						|
        if( sp->type!=MULTITERMINAL ){
 | 
						|
          fprintf(sql,
 | 
						|
            "INSERT INTO rulerhs(ruleid,pos,sym)VALUES(%d,%d,%d);\n",
 | 
						|
            i,j,sp->index
 | 
						|
          );
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          int k;
 | 
						|
          for(k=0; k<sp->nsubsym; k++){
 | 
						|
            fprintf(sql,
 | 
						|
              "INSERT INTO rulerhs(ruleid,pos,sym)VALUES(%d,%d,%d);\n",
 | 
						|
              i,j,sp->subsym[k]->index
 | 
						|
            );
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(sql, "COMMIT;\n");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lineno = 1;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, 
 | 
						|
     "/* This file is automatically generated by Lemon from input grammar\n"
 | 
						|
     "** source file \"%s\". */\n", lemp->filename); lineno += 2;
 | 
						|
  
 | 
						|
  /* The first %include directive begins with a C-language comment,
 | 
						|
  ** then skip over the header comment of the template file
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->include==0 ) lemp->include = "";
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; ISSPACE(lemp->include[i]); i++){
 | 
						|
    if( lemp->include[i]=='\n' ){
 | 
						|
      lemp->include += i+1;
 | 
						|
      i = -1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->include[0]=='/' ){
 | 
						|
    tplt_skip_header(in,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate the include code, if any */
 | 
						|
  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->include,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  if( mhflag ){
 | 
						|
    char *incName = file_makename(lemp, ".h");
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#include \"%s\"\n", incName); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    free(incName);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate #defines for all tokens */
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->tokenprefix ) prefix = lemp->tokenprefix;
 | 
						|
  else                    prefix = "";
 | 
						|
  if( mhflag ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#if INTERFACE\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#ifndef %s%s\n", prefix, lemp->symbols[1]->name);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=1; i<lemp->nterminal; i++){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %s%-30s %2d\n",prefix,lemp->symbols[i]->name,i);
 | 
						|
    lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#endif\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate the defines */
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YYCODETYPE %s\n",
 | 
						|
    minimum_size_type(0, lemp->nsymbol, &szCodeType)); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YYNOCODE %d\n",lemp->nsymbol);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YYACTIONTYPE %s\n",
 | 
						|
    minimum_size_type(0,lemp->maxAction,&szActionType)); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->wildcard ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define YYWILDCARD %d\n",
 | 
						|
       lemp->wildcard->index); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  print_stack_union(out,lemp,&lineno,mhflag);
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#ifndef YYSTACKDEPTH\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->stacksize ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define YYSTACKDEPTH %s\n",lemp->stacksize);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define YYSTACKDEPTH 100\n");  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#endif\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  if( mhflag ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#if INTERFACE\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  name = lemp->name ? lemp->name : "Parse";
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->arg && lemp->arg[0] ){
 | 
						|
    i = lemonStrlen(lemp->arg);
 | 
						|
    while( i>=1 && ISSPACE(lemp->arg[i-1]) ) i--;
 | 
						|
    while( i>=1 && (ISALNUM(lemp->arg[i-1]) || lemp->arg[i-1]=='_') ) i--;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_SDECL %s;\n",name,lemp->arg);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_PDECL ,%s\n",name,lemp->arg);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_PARAM ,%s\n",name,&lemp->arg[i]);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_FETCH %s=yypParser->%s;\n",
 | 
						|
                 name,lemp->arg,&lemp->arg[i]);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_STORE yypParser->%s=%s;\n",
 | 
						|
                 name,&lemp->arg[i],&lemp->arg[i]);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_SDECL\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_PDECL\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_PARAM\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_FETCH\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_STORE\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->ctx && lemp->ctx[0] ){
 | 
						|
    i = lemonStrlen(lemp->ctx);
 | 
						|
    while( i>=1 && ISSPACE(lemp->ctx[i-1]) ) i--;
 | 
						|
    while( i>=1 && (ISALNUM(lemp->ctx[i-1]) || lemp->ctx[i-1]=='_') ) i--;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_SDECL %s;\n",name,lemp->ctx);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_PDECL ,%s\n",name,lemp->ctx);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_PARAM ,%s\n",name,&lemp->ctx[i]);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_FETCH %s=yypParser->%s;\n",
 | 
						|
                 name,lemp->ctx,&lemp->ctx[i]);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_STORE yypParser->%s=%s;\n",
 | 
						|
                 name,&lemp->ctx[i],&lemp->ctx[i]);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_SDECL\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_PDECL\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_PARAM\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_FETCH\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define %sCTX_STORE\n",name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( mhflag ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#endif\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->errsym && lemp->errsym->useCnt ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define YYERRORSYMBOL %d\n",lemp->errsym->index); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define YYERRSYMDT yy%d\n",lemp->errsym->dtnum); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->has_fallback ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"#define YYFALLBACK 1\n");  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Compute the action table, but do not output it yet.  The action
 | 
						|
  ** table must be computed before generating the YYNSTATE macro because
 | 
						|
  ** we need to know how many states can be eliminated.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  ax = (struct axset *) calloc(lemp->nxstate*2, sizeof(ax[0]));
 | 
						|
  if( ax==0 ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(stderr,"malloc failed\n");
 | 
						|
    exit(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    ax[i*2].stp = stp;
 | 
						|
    ax[i*2].isTkn = 1;
 | 
						|
    ax[i*2].nAction = stp->nTknAct;
 | 
						|
    ax[i*2+1].stp = stp;
 | 
						|
    ax[i*2+1].isTkn = 0;
 | 
						|
    ax[i*2+1].nAction = stp->nNtAct;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  mxTknOfst = mnTknOfst = 0;
 | 
						|
  mxNtOfst = mnNtOfst = 0;
 | 
						|
  /* In an effort to minimize the action table size, use the heuristic
 | 
						|
  ** of placing the largest action sets first */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate*2; i++) ax[i].iOrder = i;
 | 
						|
  qsort(ax, lemp->nxstate*2, sizeof(ax[0]), axset_compare);
 | 
						|
  pActtab = acttab_alloc(lemp->nsymbol, lemp->nterminal);
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate*2 && ax[i].nAction>0; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = ax[i].stp;
 | 
						|
    if( ax[i].isTkn ){
 | 
						|
      for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
        int action;
 | 
						|
        if( ap->sp->index>=lemp->nterminal ) continue;
 | 
						|
        action = compute_action(lemp, ap);
 | 
						|
        if( action<0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
        acttab_action(pActtab, ap->sp->index, action);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      stp->iTknOfst = acttab_insert(pActtab, 1);
 | 
						|
      if( stp->iTknOfst<mnTknOfst ) mnTknOfst = stp->iTknOfst;
 | 
						|
      if( stp->iTknOfst>mxTknOfst ) mxTknOfst = stp->iTknOfst;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
        int action;
 | 
						|
        if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nterminal ) continue;
 | 
						|
        if( ap->sp->index==lemp->nsymbol ) continue;
 | 
						|
        action = compute_action(lemp, ap);
 | 
						|
        if( action<0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
        acttab_action(pActtab, ap->sp->index, action);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      stp->iNtOfst = acttab_insert(pActtab, 0);
 | 
						|
      if( stp->iNtOfst<mnNtOfst ) mnNtOfst = stp->iNtOfst;
 | 
						|
      if( stp->iNtOfst>mxNtOfst ) mxNtOfst = stp->iNtOfst;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
#if 0  /* Uncomment for a trace of how the yy_action[] table fills out */
 | 
						|
    { int jj, nn;
 | 
						|
      for(jj=nn=0; jj<pActtab->nAction; jj++){
 | 
						|
        if( pActtab->aAction[jj].action<0 ) nn++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      printf("%4d: State %3d %s n: %2d size: %5d freespace: %d\n",
 | 
						|
             i, stp->statenum, ax[i].isTkn ? "Token" : "Var  ",
 | 
						|
             ax[i].nAction, pActtab->nAction, nn);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  free(ax);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Mark rules that are actually used for reduce actions after all
 | 
						|
  ** optimizations have been applied
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next) rp->doesReduce = LEMON_FALSE;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    for(ap=lemp->sorted[i]->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type==REDUCE || ap->type==SHIFTREDUCE ){
 | 
						|
        ap->x.rp->doesReduce = 1;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Finish rendering the constants now that the action table has
 | 
						|
  ** been computed */
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YYNSTATE             %d\n",lemp->nxstate);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YYNRULE              %d\n",lemp->nrule);  lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YYNRULE_WITH_ACTION  %d\n",lemp->nruleWithAction);
 | 
						|
         lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YYNTOKEN             %d\n",lemp->nterminal); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MAX_SHIFT         %d\n",lemp->nxstate-1); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  i = lemp->minShiftReduce;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE   %d\n",i); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  i += lemp->nrule;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE   %d\n", i-1); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_ERROR_ACTION      %d\n", lemp->errAction); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_ACCEPT_ACTION     %d\n", lemp->accAction); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_NO_ACTION         %d\n", lemp->noAction); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MIN_REDUCE        %d\n", lemp->minReduce); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  i = lemp->minReduce + lemp->nrule;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MAX_REDUCE        %d\n", i-1); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Now output the action table and its associates:
 | 
						|
  **
 | 
						|
  **  yy_action[]        A single table containing all actions.
 | 
						|
  **  yy_lookahead[]     A table containing the lookahead for each entry in
 | 
						|
  **                     yy_action.  Used to detect hash collisions.
 | 
						|
  **  yy_shift_ofst[]    For each state, the offset into yy_action for
 | 
						|
  **                     shifting terminals.
 | 
						|
  **  yy_reduce_ofst[]   For each state, the offset into yy_action for
 | 
						|
  **                     shifting non-terminals after a reduce.
 | 
						|
  **  yy_default[]       Default action for each state.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Output the yy_action table */
 | 
						|
  lemp->nactiontab = n = acttab_action_size(pActtab);
 | 
						|
  lemp->tablesize += n*szActionType;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"#define YY_ACTTAB_COUNT (%d)\n", n); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"static const YYACTIONTYPE yy_action[] = {\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
 | 
						|
    int action = acttab_yyaction(pActtab, i);
 | 
						|
    if( action<0 ) action = lemp->noAction;
 | 
						|
    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out, " %4d,", action);
 | 
						|
    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
      j = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      j++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Output the yy_lookahead table */
 | 
						|
  lemp->nlookaheadtab = n = acttab_lookahead_size(pActtab);
 | 
						|
  lemp->tablesize += n*szCodeType;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"static const YYCODETYPE yy_lookahead[] = {\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
 | 
						|
    int la = acttab_yylookahead(pActtab, i);
 | 
						|
    if( la<0 ) la = lemp->nsymbol;
 | 
						|
    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out, " %4d,", la);
 | 
						|
    if( j==9 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
      j = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      j++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Add extra entries to the end of the yy_lookahead[] table so that
 | 
						|
  ** yy_shift_ofst[]+iToken will always be a valid index into the array,
 | 
						|
  ** even for the largest possible value of yy_shift_ofst[] and iToken. */
 | 
						|
  nLookAhead = lemp->nterminal + lemp->nactiontab;
 | 
						|
  while( i<nLookAhead ){
 | 
						|
    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out, " %4d,", lemp->nterminal);
 | 
						|
    if( j==9 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
      j = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      j++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    i++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( j>0 ){ fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++; }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Output the yy_shift_ofst[] table */
 | 
						|
  n = lemp->nxstate;
 | 
						|
  while( n>0 && lemp->sorted[n-1]->iTknOfst==NO_OFFSET ) n--;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#define YY_SHIFT_COUNT    (%d)\n", n-1); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#define YY_SHIFT_MIN      (%d)\n", mnTknOfst); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#define YY_SHIFT_MAX      (%d)\n", mxTknOfst); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "static const %s yy_shift_ofst[] = {\n",
 | 
						|
       minimum_size_type(mnTknOfst, lemp->nterminal+lemp->nactiontab, &sz));
 | 
						|
       lineno++;
 | 
						|
  lemp->tablesize += n*sz;
 | 
						|
  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
 | 
						|
    int ofst;
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    ofst = stp->iTknOfst;
 | 
						|
    if( ofst==NO_OFFSET ) ofst = lemp->nactiontab;
 | 
						|
    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out, " %4d,", ofst);
 | 
						|
    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
      j = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      j++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Output the yy_reduce_ofst[] table */
 | 
						|
  n = lemp->nxstate;
 | 
						|
  while( n>0 && lemp->sorted[n-1]->iNtOfst==NO_OFFSET ) n--;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#define YY_REDUCE_COUNT (%d)\n", n-1); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#define YY_REDUCE_MIN   (%d)\n", mnNtOfst); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "#define YY_REDUCE_MAX   (%d)\n", mxNtOfst); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "static const %s yy_reduce_ofst[] = {\n",
 | 
						|
          minimum_size_type(mnNtOfst-1, mxNtOfst, &sz)); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  lemp->tablesize += n*sz;
 | 
						|
  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
 | 
						|
    int ofst;
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    ofst = stp->iNtOfst;
 | 
						|
    if( ofst==NO_OFFSET ) ofst = mnNtOfst - 1;
 | 
						|
    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out, " %4d,", ofst);
 | 
						|
    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
      j = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      j++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Output the default action table */
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "static const YYACTIONTYPE yy_default[] = {\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  n = lemp->nxstate;
 | 
						|
  lemp->tablesize += n*szActionType;
 | 
						|
  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
 | 
						|
    if( stp->iDfltReduce<0 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, " %4d,", lemp->errAction);
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, " %4d,", stp->iDfltReduce + lemp->minReduce);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
      j = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      j++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate the table of fallback tokens.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->has_fallback ){
 | 
						|
    int mx = lemp->nterminal - 1;
 | 
						|
    /* 2019-08-28:  Generate fallback entries for every token to avoid
 | 
						|
    ** having to do a range check on the index */
 | 
						|
    /* while( mx>0 && lemp->symbols[mx]->fallback==0 ){ mx--; } */
 | 
						|
    lemp->tablesize += (mx+1)*szCodeType;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<=mx; i++){
 | 
						|
      struct symbol *p = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
      if( p->fallback==0 ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out, "    0,  /* %10s => nothing */\n", p->name);
 | 
						|
      }else{
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out, "  %3d,  /* %10s => %s */\n", p->fallback->index,
 | 
						|
          p->name, p->fallback->name);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      lineno++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name, in, out, &lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate a table containing the symbolic name of every symbol
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"  /* %4d */ \"%s\",\n",i, lemp->symbols[i]->name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate a table containing a text string that describes every
 | 
						|
  ** rule in the rule set of the grammar.  This information is used
 | 
						|
  ** when tracing REDUCE actions.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0, rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next, i++){
 | 
						|
    assert( rp->iRule==i );
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out," /* %3d */ \"", i);
 | 
						|
    writeRuleText(out, rp);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"\",\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate code which executes every time a symbol is popped from
 | 
						|
  ** the stack while processing errors or while destroying the parser.
 | 
						|
  ** (In other words, generate the %destructor actions)
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->tokendest ){
 | 
						|
    int once = 1;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
      struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
      if( sp==0 || sp->type!=TERMINAL ) continue;
 | 
						|
      if( once ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out, "      /* TERMINAL Destructor */\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
        once = 0;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n", sp->index, sp->name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol && lemp->symbols[i]->type!=TERMINAL; i++);
 | 
						|
    if( i<lemp->nsymbol ){
 | 
						|
      emit_destructor_code(out,lemp->symbols[i],lemp,&lineno);
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out,"      break;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->vardest ){
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *dflt_sp = 0;
 | 
						|
    int once = 1;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
      struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
      if( sp==0 || sp->type==TERMINAL ||
 | 
						|
          sp->index<=0 || sp->destructor!=0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
      if( once ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out, "      /* Default NON-TERMINAL Destructor */\n");lineno++;
 | 
						|
        once = 0;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n", sp->index, sp->name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
      dflt_sp = sp;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( dflt_sp!=0 ){
 | 
						|
      emit_destructor_code(out,dflt_sp,lemp,&lineno);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"      break;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
 | 
						|
    struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
 | 
						|
    if( sp==0 || sp->type==TERMINAL || sp->destructor==0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
    if( sp->destLineno<0 ) continue;  /* Already emitted */
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n", sp->index, sp->name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Combine duplicate destructors into a single case */
 | 
						|
    for(j=i+1; j<lemp->nsymbol; j++){
 | 
						|
      struct symbol *sp2 = lemp->symbols[j];
 | 
						|
      if( sp2 && sp2->type!=TERMINAL && sp2->destructor
 | 
						|
          && sp2->dtnum==sp->dtnum
 | 
						|
          && strcmp(sp->destructor,sp2->destructor)==0 ){
 | 
						|
         fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n",
 | 
						|
                 sp2->index, sp2->name); lineno++;
 | 
						|
         sp2->destLineno = -1;  /* Avoid emitting this destructor again */
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    emit_destructor_code(out,lemp->symbols[i],lemp,&lineno);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"      break;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate code which executes whenever the parser stack overflows */
 | 
						|
  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->overflow,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate the tables of rule information.  yyRuleInfoLhs[] and
 | 
						|
  ** yyRuleInfoNRhs[].
 | 
						|
  **
 | 
						|
  ** Note: This code depends on the fact that rules are number
 | 
						|
  ** sequentially beginning with 0.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0, rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next, i++){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"  %4d,  /* (%d) ", rp->lhs->index, i);
 | 
						|
     rule_print(out, rp);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out," */\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  for(i=0, rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next, i++){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"  %3d,  /* (%d) ", -rp->nrhs, i);
 | 
						|
    rule_print(out, rp);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out," */\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate code which execution during each REDUCE action */
 | 
						|
  i = 0;
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    i += translate_code(lemp, rp);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( i ){
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"        YYMINORTYPE yylhsminor;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* First output rules other than the default: rule */
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    struct rule *rp2;               /* Other rules with the same action */
 | 
						|
    if( rp->codeEmitted ) continue;
 | 
						|
    if( rp->noCode ){
 | 
						|
      /* No C code actions, so this will be part of the "default:" rule */
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"      case %d: /* ", rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
    writeRuleText(out, rp);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out, " */\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    for(rp2=rp->next; rp2; rp2=rp2->next){
 | 
						|
      if( rp2->code==rp->code && rp2->codePrefix==rp->codePrefix
 | 
						|
             && rp2->codeSuffix==rp->codeSuffix ){
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out,"      case %d: /* ", rp2->iRule);
 | 
						|
        writeRuleText(out, rp2);
 | 
						|
        fprintf(out," */ yytestcase(yyruleno==%d);\n", rp2->iRule); lineno++;
 | 
						|
        rp2->codeEmitted = 1;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    emit_code(out,rp,lemp,&lineno);
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"        break;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    rp->codeEmitted = 1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Finally, output the default: rule.  We choose as the default: all
 | 
						|
  ** empty actions. */
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"      default:\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
 | 
						|
    if( rp->codeEmitted ) continue;
 | 
						|
    assert( rp->noCode );
 | 
						|
    fprintf(out,"      /* (%d) ", rp->iRule);
 | 
						|
    writeRuleText(out, rp);
 | 
						|
    if( rp->neverReduce ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, " (NEVER REDUCES) */ assert(yyruleno!=%d);\n",
 | 
						|
              rp->iRule); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    }else if( rp->doesReduce ){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, " */ yytestcase(yyruleno==%d);\n", rp->iRule); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out, " (OPTIMIZED OUT) */ assert(yyruleno!=%d);\n",
 | 
						|
              rp->iRule); lineno++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  fprintf(out,"        break;\n"); lineno++;
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate code which executes if a parse fails */
 | 
						|
  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->failure,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate code which executes when a syntax error occurs */
 | 
						|
  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->error,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Generate code which executes when the parser accepts its input */
 | 
						|
  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->accept,&lineno);
 | 
						|
  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Append any addition code the user desires */
 | 
						|
  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->extracode,&lineno);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  acttab_free(pActtab);
 | 
						|
  fclose(in);
 | 
						|
  fclose(out);
 | 
						|
  if( sql ) fclose(sql);
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Generate a header file for the parser */
 | 
						|
void ReportHeader(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  FILE *out, *in;
 | 
						|
  const char *prefix;
 | 
						|
  char line[LINESIZE];
 | 
						|
  char pattern[LINESIZE];
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( lemp->tokenprefix ) prefix = lemp->tokenprefix;
 | 
						|
  else                    prefix = "";
 | 
						|
  in = file_open(lemp,".h","rb");
 | 
						|
  if( in ){
 | 
						|
    int nextChar;
 | 
						|
    for(i=1; i<lemp->nterminal && fgets(line,LINESIZE,in); i++){
 | 
						|
      lemon_sprintf(pattern,"#define %s%-30s %3d\n",
 | 
						|
                    prefix,lemp->symbols[i]->name,i);
 | 
						|
      if( strcmp(line,pattern) ) break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    nextChar = fgetc(in);
 | 
						|
    fclose(in);
 | 
						|
    if( i==lemp->nterminal && nextChar==EOF ){
 | 
						|
      /* No change in the file.  Don't rewrite it. */
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  out = file_open(lemp,".h","wb");
 | 
						|
  if( out ){
 | 
						|
    for(i=1; i<lemp->nterminal; i++){
 | 
						|
      fprintf(out,"#define %s%-30s %3d\n",prefix,lemp->symbols[i]->name,i);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    fclose(out);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Reduce the size of the action tables, if possible, by making use
 | 
						|
** of defaults.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** In this version, we take the most frequent REDUCE action and make
 | 
						|
** it the default.  Except, there is no default if the wildcard token
 | 
						|
** is a possible look-ahead.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void CompressTables(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap, *ap2, *nextap;
 | 
						|
  struct rule *rp, *rp2, *rbest;
 | 
						|
  int nbest, n;
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  int usesWildcard;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    nbest = 0;
 | 
						|
    rbest = 0;
 | 
						|
    usesWildcard = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type==SHIFT && ap->sp==lemp->wildcard ){
 | 
						|
        usesWildcard = 1;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type!=REDUCE ) continue;
 | 
						|
      rp = ap->x.rp;
 | 
						|
      if( rp->lhsStart ) continue;
 | 
						|
      if( rp==rbest ) continue;
 | 
						|
      n = 1;
 | 
						|
      for(ap2=ap->next; ap2; ap2=ap2->next){
 | 
						|
        if( ap2->type!=REDUCE ) continue;
 | 
						|
        rp2 = ap2->x.rp;
 | 
						|
        if( rp2==rbest ) continue;
 | 
						|
        if( rp2==rp ) n++;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if( n>nbest ){
 | 
						|
        nbest = n;
 | 
						|
        rbest = rp;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Do not make a default if the number of rules to default
 | 
						|
    ** is not at least 1 or if the wildcard token is a possible
 | 
						|
    ** lookahead.
 | 
						|
    */
 | 
						|
    if( nbest<1 || usesWildcard ) continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    /* Combine matching REDUCE actions into a single default */
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type==REDUCE && ap->x.rp==rbest ) break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    assert( ap );
 | 
						|
    ap->sp = Symbol_new("{default}");
 | 
						|
    for(ap=ap->next; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type==REDUCE && ap->x.rp==rbest ) ap->type = NOT_USED;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    stp->ap = Action_sort(stp->ap);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type==SHIFT ) break;
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type==REDUCE && ap->x.rp!=rbest ) break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if( ap==0 ){
 | 
						|
      stp->autoReduce = 1;
 | 
						|
      stp->pDfltReduce = rbest;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* Make a second pass over all states and actions.  Convert
 | 
						|
  ** every action that is a SHIFT to an autoReduce state into
 | 
						|
  ** a SHIFTREDUCE action.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      struct state *pNextState;
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type!=SHIFT ) continue;
 | 
						|
      pNextState = ap->x.stp;
 | 
						|
      if( pNextState->autoReduce && pNextState->pDfltReduce!=0 ){
 | 
						|
        ap->type = SHIFTREDUCE;
 | 
						|
        ap->x.rp = pNextState->pDfltReduce;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /* If a SHIFTREDUCE action specifies a rule that has a single RHS term
 | 
						|
  ** (meaning that the SHIFTREDUCE will land back in the state where it
 | 
						|
  ** started) and if there is no C-code associated with the reduce action,
 | 
						|
  ** then we can go ahead and convert the action to be the same as the
 | 
						|
  ** action for the RHS of the rule.
 | 
						|
  */
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=nextap){
 | 
						|
      nextap = ap->next;
 | 
						|
      if( ap->type!=SHIFTREDUCE ) continue;
 | 
						|
      rp = ap->x.rp;
 | 
						|
      if( rp->noCode==0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
      if( rp->nrhs!=1 ) continue;
 | 
						|
#if 1
 | 
						|
      /* Only apply this optimization to non-terminals.  It would be OK to
 | 
						|
      ** apply it to terminal symbols too, but that makes the parser tables
 | 
						|
      ** larger. */
 | 
						|
      if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nterminal ) continue;
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
      /* If we reach this point, it means the optimization can be applied */
 | 
						|
      nextap = ap;
 | 
						|
      for(ap2=stp->ap; ap2 && (ap2==ap || ap2->sp!=rp->lhs); ap2=ap2->next){}
 | 
						|
      assert( ap2!=0 );
 | 
						|
      ap->spOpt = ap2->sp;
 | 
						|
      ap->type = ap2->type;
 | 
						|
      ap->x = ap2->x;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Compare two states for sorting purposes.  The smaller state is the
 | 
						|
** one with the most non-terminal actions.  If they have the same number
 | 
						|
** of non-terminal actions, then the smaller is the one with the most
 | 
						|
** token actions.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
static int stateResortCompare(const void *a, const void *b){
 | 
						|
  const struct state *pA = *(const struct state**)a;
 | 
						|
  const struct state *pB = *(const struct state**)b;
 | 
						|
  int n;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  n = pB->nNtAct - pA->nNtAct;
 | 
						|
  if( n==0 ){
 | 
						|
    n = pB->nTknAct - pA->nTknAct;
 | 
						|
    if( n==0 ){
 | 
						|
      n = pB->statenum - pA->statenum;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  assert( n!=0 );
 | 
						|
  return n;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Renumber and resort states so that states with fewer choices
 | 
						|
** occur at the end.  Except, keep state 0 as the first state.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
void ResortStates(struct lemon *lemp)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  struct state *stp;
 | 
						|
  struct action *ap;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
 | 
						|
    stp->nTknAct = stp->nNtAct = 0;
 | 
						|
    stp->iDfltReduce = -1; /* Init dflt action to "syntax error" */
 | 
						|
    stp->iTknOfst = NO_OFFSET;
 | 
						|
    stp->iNtOfst = NO_OFFSET;
 | 
						|
    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
 | 
						|
      int iAction = compute_action(lemp,ap);
 | 
						|
      if( iAction>=0 ){
 | 
						|
        if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nterminal ){
 | 
						|
          stp->nTknAct++;
 | 
						|
        }else if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nsymbol ){
 | 
						|
          stp->nNtAct++;
 | 
						|
        }else{
 | 
						|
          assert( stp->autoReduce==0 || stp->pDfltReduce==ap->x.rp );
 | 
						|
          stp->iDfltReduce = iAction;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  qsort(&lemp->sorted[1], lemp->nstate-1, sizeof(lemp->sorted[0]),
 | 
						|
        stateResortCompare);
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
 | 
						|
    lemp->sorted[i]->statenum = i;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  lemp->nxstate = lemp->nstate;
 | 
						|
  while( lemp->nxstate>1 && lemp->sorted[lemp->nxstate-1]->autoReduce ){
 | 
						|
    lemp->nxstate--;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/***************** From the file "set.c" ************************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Set manipulation routines for the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static int size = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Set the set size */
 | 
						|
void SetSize(int n)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  size = n+1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new set */
 | 
						|
char *SetNew(void){
 | 
						|
  char *s;
 | 
						|
  s = (char*)calloc( size, 1);
 | 
						|
  if( s==0 ){
 | 
						|
    memory_error();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return s;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Deallocate a set */
 | 
						|
void SetFree(char *s)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  free(s);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Add a new element to the set.  Return TRUE if the element was added
 | 
						|
** and FALSE if it was already there. */
 | 
						|
int SetAdd(char *s, int e)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int rv;
 | 
						|
  assert( e>=0 && e<size );
 | 
						|
  rv = s[e];
 | 
						|
  s[e] = 1;
 | 
						|
  return !rv;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Add every element of s2 to s1.  Return TRUE if s1 changes. */
 | 
						|
int SetUnion(char *s1, char *s2)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i, progress;
 | 
						|
  progress = 0;
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<size; i++){
 | 
						|
    if( s2[i]==0 ) continue;
 | 
						|
    if( s1[i]==0 ){
 | 
						|
      progress = 1;
 | 
						|
      s1[i] = 1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return progress;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/********************** From the file "table.c" ****************************/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** All code in this file has been automatically generated
 | 
						|
** from a specification in the file
 | 
						|
**              "table.q"
 | 
						|
** by the associative array code building program "aagen".
 | 
						|
** Do not edit this file!  Instead, edit the specification
 | 
						|
** file, then rerun aagen.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
** Code for processing tables in the LEMON parser generator.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
PRIVATE unsigned strhash(const char *x)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  unsigned h = 0;
 | 
						|
  while( *x ) h = h*13 + *(x++);
 | 
						|
  return h;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Works like strdup, sort of.  Save a string in malloced memory, but
 | 
						|
** keep strings in a table so that the same string is not in more
 | 
						|
** than one place.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
const char *Strsafe(const char *y)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  const char *z;
 | 
						|
  char *cpy;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( y==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  z = Strsafe_find(y);
 | 
						|
  if( z==0 && (cpy=(char *)malloc( lemonStrlen(y)+1 ))!=0 ){
 | 
						|
    lemon_strcpy(cpy,y);
 | 
						|
    z = cpy;
 | 
						|
    Strsafe_insert(z);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  MemoryCheck(z);
 | 
						|
  return z;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
 | 
						|
** associative array of type "x1".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
struct s_x1 {
 | 
						|
  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
 | 
						|
                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
 | 
						|
                          /*   equal to 1 */
 | 
						|
  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x1node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x1node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
 | 
						|
** in an associative array of type "x1".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
typedef struct s_x1node {
 | 
						|
  const char *data;        /* The data */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x1node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x1node **from;  /* Previous link */
 | 
						|
} x1node;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
 | 
						|
static struct s_x1 *x1a;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new associative array */
 | 
						|
void Strsafe_init(void){
 | 
						|
  if( x1a ) return;
 | 
						|
  x1a = (struct s_x1*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x1) );
 | 
						|
  if( x1a ){
 | 
						|
    x1a->size = 1024;
 | 
						|
    x1a->count = 0;
 | 
						|
    x1a->tbl = (x1node*)calloc(1024, sizeof(x1node) + sizeof(x1node*));
 | 
						|
    if( x1a->tbl==0 ){
 | 
						|
      free(x1a);
 | 
						|
      x1a = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      int i;
 | 
						|
      x1a->ht = (x1node**)&(x1a->tbl[1024]);
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<1024; i++) x1a->ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
 | 
						|
** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
 | 
						|
int Strsafe_insert(const char *data)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  x1node *np;
 | 
						|
  unsigned h;
 | 
						|
  unsigned ph;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x1a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  ph = strhash(data);
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x1a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x1a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( strcmp(np->data,data)==0 ){
 | 
						|
      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
 | 
						|
      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
 | 
						|
      return 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( x1a->count>=x1a->size ){
 | 
						|
    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
 | 
						|
    int i,arrSize;
 | 
						|
    struct s_x1 array;
 | 
						|
    array.size = arrSize = x1a->size*2;
 | 
						|
    array.count = x1a->count;
 | 
						|
    array.tbl = (x1node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x1node) + sizeof(x1node*));
 | 
						|
    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
 | 
						|
    array.ht = (x1node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<x1a->count; i++){
 | 
						|
      x1node *oldnp, *newnp;
 | 
						|
      oldnp = &(x1a->tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      h = strhash(oldnp->data) & (arrSize-1);
 | 
						|
      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
 | 
						|
      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
 | 
						|
      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
 | 
						|
      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
 | 
						|
      array.ht[h] = newnp;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    /* free(x1a->tbl); // This program was originally for 16-bit machines.
 | 
						|
    ** Don't worry about freeing memory on modern platforms. */
 | 
						|
    *x1a = array;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Insert the new data */
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x1a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = &(x1a->tbl[x1a->count++]);
 | 
						|
  np->data = data;
 | 
						|
  if( x1a->ht[h] ) x1a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
 | 
						|
  np->next = x1a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  x1a->ht[h] = np;
 | 
						|
  np->from = &(x1a->ht[h]);
 | 
						|
  return 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
 | 
						|
** if no such key. */
 | 
						|
const char *Strsafe_find(const char *key)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  unsigned h;
 | 
						|
  x1node *np;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x1a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  h = strhash(key) & (x1a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x1a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( strcmp(np->data,key)==0 ) break;
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return np ? np->data : 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to the (terminal or nonterminal) symbol "x".
 | 
						|
** Create a new symbol if this is the first time "x" has been seen.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
struct symbol *Symbol_new(const char *x)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *sp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  sp = Symbol_find(x);
 | 
						|
  if( sp==0 ){
 | 
						|
    sp = (struct symbol *)calloc(1, sizeof(struct symbol) );
 | 
						|
    MemoryCheck(sp);
 | 
						|
    sp->name = Strsafe(x);
 | 
						|
    sp->type = ISUPPER(*x) ? TERMINAL : NONTERMINAL;
 | 
						|
    sp->rule = 0;
 | 
						|
    sp->fallback = 0;
 | 
						|
    sp->prec = -1;
 | 
						|
    sp->assoc = UNK;
 | 
						|
    sp->firstset = 0;
 | 
						|
    sp->lambda = LEMON_FALSE;
 | 
						|
    sp->destructor = 0;
 | 
						|
    sp->destLineno = 0;
 | 
						|
    sp->datatype = 0;
 | 
						|
    sp->useCnt = 0;
 | 
						|
    Symbol_insert(sp,sp->name);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  sp->useCnt++;
 | 
						|
  return sp;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compare two symbols for sorting purposes.  Return negative,
 | 
						|
** zero, or positive if a is less then, equal to, or greater
 | 
						|
** than b.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** Symbols that begin with upper case letters (terminals or tokens)
 | 
						|
** must sort before symbols that begin with lower case letters
 | 
						|
** (non-terminals).  And MULTITERMINAL symbols (created using the
 | 
						|
** %token_class directive) must sort at the very end. Other than
 | 
						|
** that, the order does not matter.
 | 
						|
**
 | 
						|
** We find experimentally that leaving the symbols in their original
 | 
						|
** order (the order they appeared in the grammar file) gives the
 | 
						|
** smallest parser tables in SQLite.
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
int Symbolcmpp(const void *_a, const void *_b)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  const struct symbol *a = *(const struct symbol **) _a;
 | 
						|
  const struct symbol *b = *(const struct symbol **) _b;
 | 
						|
  int i1 = a->type==MULTITERMINAL ? 3 : a->name[0]>'Z' ? 2 : 1;
 | 
						|
  int i2 = b->type==MULTITERMINAL ? 3 : b->name[0]>'Z' ? 2 : 1;
 | 
						|
  return i1==i2 ? a->index - b->index : i1 - i2;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
 | 
						|
** associative array of type "x2".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
struct s_x2 {
 | 
						|
  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
 | 
						|
                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
 | 
						|
                          /*   equal to 1 */
 | 
						|
  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x2node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x2node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
 | 
						|
** in an associative array of type "x2".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
typedef struct s_x2node {
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *data;     /* The data */
 | 
						|
  const char *key;         /* The key */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x2node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x2node **from;  /* Previous link */
 | 
						|
} x2node;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
 | 
						|
static struct s_x2 *x2a;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new associative array */
 | 
						|
void Symbol_init(void){
 | 
						|
  if( x2a ) return;
 | 
						|
  x2a = (struct s_x2*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x2) );
 | 
						|
  if( x2a ){
 | 
						|
    x2a->size = 128;
 | 
						|
    x2a->count = 0;
 | 
						|
    x2a->tbl = (x2node*)calloc(128, sizeof(x2node) + sizeof(x2node*));
 | 
						|
    if( x2a->tbl==0 ){
 | 
						|
      free(x2a);
 | 
						|
      x2a = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      int i;
 | 
						|
      x2a->ht = (x2node**)&(x2a->tbl[128]);
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<128; i++) x2a->ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
 | 
						|
** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
 | 
						|
int Symbol_insert(struct symbol *data, const char *key)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  x2node *np;
 | 
						|
  unsigned h;
 | 
						|
  unsigned ph;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x2a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  ph = strhash(key);
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x2a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x2a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( strcmp(np->key,key)==0 ){
 | 
						|
      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
 | 
						|
      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
 | 
						|
      return 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( x2a->count>=x2a->size ){
 | 
						|
    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
 | 
						|
    int i,arrSize;
 | 
						|
    struct s_x2 array;
 | 
						|
    array.size = arrSize = x2a->size*2;
 | 
						|
    array.count = x2a->count;
 | 
						|
    array.tbl = (x2node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x2node) + sizeof(x2node*));
 | 
						|
    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
 | 
						|
    array.ht = (x2node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<x2a->count; i++){
 | 
						|
      x2node *oldnp, *newnp;
 | 
						|
      oldnp = &(x2a->tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      h = strhash(oldnp->key) & (arrSize-1);
 | 
						|
      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
 | 
						|
      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
 | 
						|
      newnp->key = oldnp->key;
 | 
						|
      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
 | 
						|
      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
 | 
						|
      array.ht[h] = newnp;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    /* free(x2a->tbl); // This program was originally written for 16-bit
 | 
						|
    ** machines.  Don't worry about freeing this trivial amount of memory
 | 
						|
    ** on modern platforms.  Just leak it. */
 | 
						|
    *x2a = array;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Insert the new data */
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x2a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = &(x2a->tbl[x2a->count++]);
 | 
						|
  np->key = key;
 | 
						|
  np->data = data;
 | 
						|
  if( x2a->ht[h] ) x2a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
 | 
						|
  np->next = x2a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  x2a->ht[h] = np;
 | 
						|
  np->from = &(x2a->ht[h]);
 | 
						|
  return 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
 | 
						|
** if no such key. */
 | 
						|
struct symbol *Symbol_find(const char *key)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  unsigned h;
 | 
						|
  x2node *np;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x2a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  h = strhash(key) & (x2a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x2a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( strcmp(np->key,key)==0 ) break;
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return np ? np->data : 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return the n-th data.  Return NULL if n is out of range. */
 | 
						|
struct symbol *Symbol_Nth(int n)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct symbol *data;
 | 
						|
  if( x2a && n>0 && n<=x2a->count ){
 | 
						|
    data = x2a->tbl[n-1].data;
 | 
						|
  }else{
 | 
						|
    data = 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return data;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return the size of the array */
 | 
						|
int Symbol_count()
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  return x2a ? x2a->count : 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return an array of pointers to all data in the table.
 | 
						|
** The array is obtained from malloc.  Return NULL if memory allocation
 | 
						|
** problems, or if the array is empty. */
 | 
						|
struct symbol **Symbol_arrayof()
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct symbol **array;
 | 
						|
  int i,arrSize;
 | 
						|
  if( x2a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  arrSize = x2a->count;
 | 
						|
  array = (struct symbol **)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(struct symbol *));
 | 
						|
  if( array ){
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array[i] = x2a->tbl[i].data;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return array;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compare two configurations */
 | 
						|
int Configcmp(const char *_a,const char *_b)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  const struct config *a = (struct config *) _a;
 | 
						|
  const struct config *b = (struct config *) _b;
 | 
						|
  int x;
 | 
						|
  x = a->rp->index - b->rp->index;
 | 
						|
  if( x==0 ) x = a->dot - b->dot;
 | 
						|
  return x;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Compare two states */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE int statecmp(struct config *a, struct config *b)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int rc;
 | 
						|
  for(rc=0; rc==0 && a && b;  a=a->bp, b=b->bp){
 | 
						|
    rc = a->rp->index - b->rp->index;
 | 
						|
    if( rc==0 ) rc = a->dot - b->dot;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( rc==0 ){
 | 
						|
    if( a ) rc = 1;
 | 
						|
    if( b ) rc = -1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return rc;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Hash a state */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE unsigned statehash(struct config *a)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  unsigned h=0;
 | 
						|
  while( a ){
 | 
						|
    h = h*571 + a->rp->index*37 + a->dot;
 | 
						|
    a = a->bp;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return h;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new state structure */
 | 
						|
struct state *State_new()
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct state *newstate;
 | 
						|
  newstate = (struct state *)calloc(1, sizeof(struct state) );
 | 
						|
  MemoryCheck(newstate);
 | 
						|
  return newstate;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
 | 
						|
** associative array of type "x3".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
struct s_x3 {
 | 
						|
  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
 | 
						|
                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
 | 
						|
                          /*   equal to 1 */
 | 
						|
  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x3node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x3node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
 | 
						|
** in an associative array of type "x3".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
typedef struct s_x3node {
 | 
						|
  struct state *data;                  /* The data */
 | 
						|
  struct config *key;                   /* The key */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x3node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x3node **from;  /* Previous link */
 | 
						|
} x3node;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
 | 
						|
static struct s_x3 *x3a;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new associative array */
 | 
						|
void State_init(void){
 | 
						|
  if( x3a ) return;
 | 
						|
  x3a = (struct s_x3*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x3) );
 | 
						|
  if( x3a ){
 | 
						|
    x3a->size = 128;
 | 
						|
    x3a->count = 0;
 | 
						|
    x3a->tbl = (x3node*)calloc(128, sizeof(x3node) + sizeof(x3node*));
 | 
						|
    if( x3a->tbl==0 ){
 | 
						|
      free(x3a);
 | 
						|
      x3a = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      int i;
 | 
						|
      x3a->ht = (x3node**)&(x3a->tbl[128]);
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<128; i++) x3a->ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
 | 
						|
** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
 | 
						|
int State_insert(struct state *data, struct config *key)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  x3node *np;
 | 
						|
  unsigned h;
 | 
						|
  unsigned ph;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x3a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  ph = statehash(key);
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x3a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x3a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( statecmp(np->key,key)==0 ){
 | 
						|
      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
 | 
						|
      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
 | 
						|
      return 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( x3a->count>=x3a->size ){
 | 
						|
    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
 | 
						|
    int i,arrSize;
 | 
						|
    struct s_x3 array;
 | 
						|
    array.size = arrSize = x3a->size*2;
 | 
						|
    array.count = x3a->count;
 | 
						|
    array.tbl = (x3node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x3node) + sizeof(x3node*));
 | 
						|
    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
 | 
						|
    array.ht = (x3node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<x3a->count; i++){
 | 
						|
      x3node *oldnp, *newnp;
 | 
						|
      oldnp = &(x3a->tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      h = statehash(oldnp->key) & (arrSize-1);
 | 
						|
      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
 | 
						|
      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
 | 
						|
      newnp->key = oldnp->key;
 | 
						|
      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
 | 
						|
      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
 | 
						|
      array.ht[h] = newnp;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    free(x3a->tbl);
 | 
						|
    *x3a = array;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Insert the new data */
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x3a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = &(x3a->tbl[x3a->count++]);
 | 
						|
  np->key = key;
 | 
						|
  np->data = data;
 | 
						|
  if( x3a->ht[h] ) x3a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
 | 
						|
  np->next = x3a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  x3a->ht[h] = np;
 | 
						|
  np->from = &(x3a->ht[h]);
 | 
						|
  return 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
 | 
						|
** if no such key. */
 | 
						|
struct state *State_find(struct config *key)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  unsigned h;
 | 
						|
  x3node *np;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x3a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  h = statehash(key) & (x3a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x3a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( statecmp(np->key,key)==0 ) break;
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return np ? np->data : 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return an array of pointers to all data in the table.
 | 
						|
** The array is obtained from malloc.  Return NULL if memory allocation
 | 
						|
** problems, or if the array is empty. */
 | 
						|
struct state **State_arrayof(void)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  struct state **array;
 | 
						|
  int i,arrSize;
 | 
						|
  if( x3a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  arrSize = x3a->count;
 | 
						|
  array = (struct state **)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(struct state *));
 | 
						|
  if( array ){
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array[i] = x3a->tbl[i].data;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return array;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Hash a configuration */
 | 
						|
PRIVATE unsigned confighash(struct config *a)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  unsigned h=0;
 | 
						|
  h = h*571 + a->rp->index*37 + a->dot;
 | 
						|
  return h;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
 | 
						|
** associative array of type "x4".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
struct s_x4 {
 | 
						|
  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
 | 
						|
                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
 | 
						|
                          /*   equal to 1 */
 | 
						|
  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x4node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x4node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
 | 
						|
** in an associative array of type "x4".
 | 
						|
*/
 | 
						|
typedef struct s_x4node {
 | 
						|
  struct config *data;                  /* The data */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x4node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
 | 
						|
  struct s_x4node **from;  /* Previous link */
 | 
						|
} x4node;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
 | 
						|
static struct s_x4 *x4a;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Allocate a new associative array */
 | 
						|
void Configtable_init(void){
 | 
						|
  if( x4a ) return;
 | 
						|
  x4a = (struct s_x4*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x4) );
 | 
						|
  if( x4a ){
 | 
						|
    x4a->size = 64;
 | 
						|
    x4a->count = 0;
 | 
						|
    x4a->tbl = (x4node*)calloc(64, sizeof(x4node) + sizeof(x4node*));
 | 
						|
    if( x4a->tbl==0 ){
 | 
						|
      free(x4a);
 | 
						|
      x4a = 0;
 | 
						|
    }else{
 | 
						|
      int i;
 | 
						|
      x4a->ht = (x4node**)&(x4a->tbl[64]);
 | 
						|
      for(i=0; i<64; i++) x4a->ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
 | 
						|
** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
 | 
						|
int Configtable_insert(struct config *data)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  x4node *np;
 | 
						|
  unsigned h;
 | 
						|
  unsigned ph;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x4a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  ph = confighash(data);
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x4a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x4a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( Configcmp((const char *) np->data,(const char *) data)==0 ){
 | 
						|
      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
 | 
						|
      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
 | 
						|
      return 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if( x4a->count>=x4a->size ){
 | 
						|
    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
 | 
						|
    int i,arrSize;
 | 
						|
    struct s_x4 array;
 | 
						|
    array.size = arrSize = x4a->size*2;
 | 
						|
    array.count = x4a->count;
 | 
						|
    array.tbl = (x4node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x4node) + sizeof(x4node*));
 | 
						|
    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
 | 
						|
    array.ht = (x4node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
    for(i=0; i<x4a->count; i++){
 | 
						|
      x4node *oldnp, *newnp;
 | 
						|
      oldnp = &(x4a->tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      h = confighash(oldnp->data) & (arrSize-1);
 | 
						|
      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
 | 
						|
      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
 | 
						|
      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
 | 
						|
      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
 | 
						|
      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
 | 
						|
      array.ht[h] = newnp;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    /* free(x4a->tbl); // This code was originall written for 16-bit machines.
 | 
						|
    ** on modern machines, don't worry about freeing this trival amount of
 | 
						|
    ** memory. */
 | 
						|
    *x4a = array;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  /* Insert the new data */
 | 
						|
  h = ph & (x4a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = &(x4a->tbl[x4a->count++]);
 | 
						|
  np->data = data;
 | 
						|
  if( x4a->ht[h] ) x4a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
 | 
						|
  np->next = x4a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  x4a->ht[h] = np;
 | 
						|
  np->from = &(x4a->ht[h]);
 | 
						|
  return 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
 | 
						|
** if no such key. */
 | 
						|
struct config *Configtable_find(struct config *key)
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int h;
 | 
						|
  x4node *np;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if( x4a==0 ) return 0;
 | 
						|
  h = confighash(key) & (x4a->size-1);
 | 
						|
  np = x4a->ht[h];
 | 
						|
  while( np ){
 | 
						|
    if( Configcmp((const char *) np->data,(const char *) key)==0 ) break;
 | 
						|
    np = np->next;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return np ? np->data : 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* Remove all data from the table.  Pass each data to the function "f"
 | 
						|
** as it is removed.  ("f" may be null to avoid this step.) */
 | 
						|
void Configtable_clear(int(*f)(struct config *))
 | 
						|
{
 | 
						|
  int i;
 | 
						|
  if( x4a==0 || x4a->count==0 ) return;
 | 
						|
  if( f ) for(i=0; i<x4a->count; i++) (*f)(x4a->tbl[i].data);
 | 
						|
  for(i=0; i<x4a->size; i++) x4a->ht[i] = 0;
 | 
						|
  x4a->count = 0;
 | 
						|
  return;
 | 
						|
}
 |